JP6507412B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a game machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is shot into a game area by a launch device, and when the game medium is won in a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a premium game medium such as a predetermined number of prize balls Some are given to the player. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying identification information (also referred to as "variation") is provided when a gaming medium has a prize in a predetermined winning area (start winning opening) (a start condition is satisfied). When the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result, there is one configured to be controllable to an advantageous state such as a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) which is advantageous for the player.

  Further, as a gaming machine as described above, a gaming machine is known which displays an image of a decorative symbol and a character image in accordance with a predetermined priority (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2005-13477, A

  However, there is a possibility that the effect image to be diversified can not be suitably displayed.

  The present invention is made in view of the above-mentioned point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying a diversifying effect image.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention performs variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or slot) Machine etc.), and effect executing means for executing effects using the effect images (eg, various effect images shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 48, etc.) (eg, group notice effect of step S545) Character control means, character information display means for displaying character information related to variable display, operation control processing, chance zone effect operation control processing of step S543, etc. As shown in FIG. 27A, the first effect (for example, chance zone effect or the like) for displaying the first effect image (for example, the chance zone effect image or the like) in the area of the image size "small" In a second area (area of the image size “large” as shown in FIG. 27A) which is row-enabled and is wider than the first area in the second layer disposed on the front side of the first layer When it is possible to execute a second effect (for example, a group notice effect or the like) displaying a second effect image (for example, a group notice effect image or the like) and execute the first effect and the second effect, the second effect The first effect image is displayed on one layer, and the second effect image is displayed on the second layer, whereby the second effect image is displayed on the front side of the first effect image, and identification information is variable. When displaying, the identification information is displayed on the layer arranged on the back side of the first layer, and when the identification information is displayed on the stop, the layer arranged on the front side of the second layer Display the identification information on the The information display means displays the character information corresponding to the effect being executed during the variable display, displays the content of the character information so as to be identifiable even when the second effect image is displayed, and corresponds to the character information The display time of the character information is varied according to the type of effect to be performed.

  According to the above configuration, the effect image to be diversified can be suitably displayed.

(2) In addition, the gaming machine according to the above (1) is a notification means (for example, error notification in step S75) for performing notification using a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28 etc.) Processing etc., the notification means can notify an error using an error notification image (for example, an error notification image shown in FIG. 28), and the error notification image is displayed in comparison with the effect image. For example, as shown in FIG. 30, the error notification image of Z value “0” is displayed in front of the combination effect effect image of Z value “4”, for example, as shown in FIG. ).

  According to the above configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed.

(3) Further, the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2) is a notification means (for example, for performing the notification using a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28 etc.)). When the specific effect (for example, step 5 (SU5) of the step-up notice effect, group notice effect, role effect effect, etc.) is executed. It is possible to notify that the specific effect has been executed using an information image (for example, an effect notification image etc.), and the information image is set to have a high priority (for example, as shown in FIG. 30) The Z values "1" to "3" are set in the effect execution notification image).

  According to the above configuration, the visibility of the information image can be enhanced.

(4) Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3), the effect executing means displays in conjunction with the operation of the first movable body (for example, the movable body A etc.) The second interlocking image displayed in conjunction with the first interlocking effect using the first interlocking image (for example, the character effect effect image a) to be played and the operation of the second movable body (for example, the movable body B or the like) (For example, a second interlocking effect using the character-effect effect image b) can be performed, and the first interlocking image may have a priority different from that of the second interlocking image. For example, different Z values may be set to the character effect effect image a and the character effect effect image b).

  According to the above configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed.

(5) In the gaming machine according to (4), the first interlocked image may have the same priority as the second interlocked image (for example, as described above) The same Z value may be set to the character effect effect image a and the character effect effect image b).

  According to the above configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed.

(6) Further, the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (5) is a variable display means (for example, variable display start setting processing) for performing variable display of identification information (for example, a decorative symbol etc.) A process of setting a production control pattern corresponding to a fluctuation pattern as a usage pattern (step S532) or a process of variably displaying a decorative pattern based on the production control pattern set in the variable display production process (step S542) The effect executing means is predetermined as an effect notifying that the variable winning device (e.g., the normally variable winning ball device 6b etc.) is controlled in a state (e.g. high base state etc.) in which the game medium easily wins. A predetermined performance (for example, a predetermined performance to be executed in the predetermined effect processing shown in FIG. 46) using the effect image (for example, the predetermined effect image in FIG. 48B) Etc., and the predetermined effect image is set to have a higher priority for image display as compared to the identification information in at least a predetermined period during variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 48C), During variable display of the symbol, the predetermined effect image is displayed in a layer higher than the decorative symbol), and the priority of the image display is set lower compared to the identification information at least in the predetermined period during stop display. For example, as shown in FIG. 48 (D), the predetermined effect image is displayed in a layer lower than the decorative symbol while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  According to the above configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed.

(7) In addition, the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (6) uses the notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 49, FIG. 53, etc.) The notification means (for example, the award ball number notification operation control process of step S573, the accumulated award ball number notification operation control process of step S574, etc.) for performing notification is provided, and the notification means includes a first value notification image (for example, The size of the value (for example, the number of winning balls in the big hit, etc.) acquired in a specific period (for example, the big hit gaming state of each time, etc.) using the winning ball number informing images, etc. The size of the value (for example, the big prize winning prize ball in a row) obtained in a special period (for example, a big hit gaming state which is continuously transferred without becoming a normal state) using a number notification image or the like) Number etc.), and the first Different priorities may be set to the value notification image and the second value notification image (for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (D), the cumulative number of notification balls is notified to the number notification image of award balls) Z value different from the image is set).

  According to the above configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

(8) In addition, the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (7) uses a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 49, FIG. 53, etc.) Informing means (for example, error informing process in step S75, prize ball number informing operation control process in step S573, accumulated prize ball number informing operation control process in step S574, etc.) for performing informing, the informing means includes Values obtained by using an error notification image (for example, an error notification image shown in FIG. 28) and a value notification image (for example, an award ball number notification image, a cumulative award ball number notification image, etc.) , And the size of the winning ball number etc.) may be notified, and the error notification image and the value notification image may be set to have different priorities (for example, as shown in FIG. 49D) , Error notification image, ball number report It sets different Z values from the image and the cumulative prize cell count notification image).

  According to the above configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

(9) In addition, the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (8) uses the notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 49, FIG. 53, etc.) The notification means (for example, the error notification process in step S75, the definite variation confirmation notification operation control process in step S575, and the like) for performing the notification is provided, and the notification means includes an error notification image (for example, the error notification image shown in FIG. 28). An error, a status notification image (for example, a probability variation confirmation notification image shown in FIG. 53, an image notifying that the base is high, an image notifying that a specific variation pattern table is referred to, etc.) It is possible to notify the state (for example, control to be changed to a definite change state after the end of the big hit gaming state, to be controlled to a high base state etc after the end of the big hit game state, etc.) And state A priority different from that of the knowledge image may be set (for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), in the error notification image, a Z value different from the definite variation confirmation notification image is set) Yes).

  According to the above configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

It is a front view of a pachinko game machine by one mode of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the effect control command. FIG. 8 is an explanatory view exemplifying a game random number counted on the main substrate side. It is an explanatory view explaining an example of a change category and a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a data control area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a production control pattern, etc. It is a block diagram etc. which show the structural example of the data holding area for presentation control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sensor error alerting | reporting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the starting winning a prize judgment processing in special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of starting winning a prize. It is a flow chart etc. which show an example of random number value judging processing at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a prefetch determination table, etc. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a change category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error alerting | reporting process. It is a figure which shows an example of Z value etc. of various images. It is a figure which shows an example of various images. It is a figure which shows an example of various images. FIG. 2 is a conceptual view schematically showing layers of various images. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the effect determination processing at the time of winning. It is an explanatory view explaining processing determination processing such as suspension. It is an explanatory view explaining a representation pattern etc., such as suspension. It is an explanatory view explaining chance zone production determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is an explanatory view explaining a decision ratio etc. of execution existence of main notice production. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production processing under variable display. It is a flow chart which shows an example of chance zone production operation control processing etc. It is a flow chart which shows an example of group notice production operation control processing etc. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production execution informing operation control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of waiting processing per special drawing. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the predetermined | prescribed presentation process which performs the predetermined | prescribed presentation related to opening of a normally variable winning a prize ball apparatus. It is an explanatory view explaining a determination rate of execution existence etc. of a predetermined performance. It is an explanatory view explaining predetermined performance operation control processing etc. It is a figure which shows an example of Z value etc. of another image. It is a conceptual diagram etc. which represented the layer of various images typically. It is a conceptual diagram etc. which represented the layer of various images typically. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during a round. It is a figure which shows an example of Z value etc. of another image. It is a conceptual diagram etc. which represented the layer of various images typically.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. In the game board 2, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device.

  In the lower part of the game area of the game board 2, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The regular winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable winglets that changes between a normally open state in a vertical position and an enlarged open state in a tilting position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric symbol shown in FIG. A tulip type character (normal motorized character) is provided, and a start area (second start area) forms a second start winning opening. When the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are not particularly distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as "starting winning opening".

  As an example, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal motorized combination is off. It will be in the normally open state which is unfortunate. On the other hand, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by tilting control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric combination is on. It will be in the open state where it is easy to enter.

  In addition, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even when the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normal opening state, the gaming ball may enter more than in the enlarged opening state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening by, for example, closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. As described above, the second start winning opening as the second start area is the enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and the normal open state in which the game ball hardly passes (enters) or can not pass (enter) Change to

  The game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG.

  In addition, the game ball which has passed (entered) a winning opening such as a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) or a large winning opening (described later) is provided corresponding to each winning opening. What is detected by the switches (first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, count switch 23 (described later)) is referred to as "winning". Among the "winning", winning to the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening) is referred to as "starting winning", and in particular, winning to the first starting winning opening is referred to as first starting winning. The winning of the second starting winning opening is referred to as a second starting winning.

  While a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the occurrence of the first start winning (the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A), the first special view reserve memory number (described later ) Is a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”) or less, a decorative symbol executed in the first special figure game (described later) executed in the first special symbol display device 4A or the image display device 5 (described later) A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a variable display of is established.

  In addition, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the occurrence of the second start winning (the detection of the game ball by the second start opening switch 22B), and the second special view reserve memory number If (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"), it is executed in a second special figure game (described later) or image display device 5 (described later) executed in the second special symbol display device 4B. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as variable display of a decorative symbol is satisfied. Note that the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the first start winning and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the second starting win may be the same or different from each other. Good.

  The first special view reserve memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not executed immediately when the first start winning occurs and are temporarily suspended. The occurrence of the first start prize even when the first start condition for executing a variable display game such as a first special view game (described later) or a variable display of a decorative symbol is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start prize. If the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game described above is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established earlier is being When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a state of waiting for execution). That is, the number of first special view pending storages is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning that is in the execution waiting state. Each time the first start condition is satisfied, the number of first to-be-stored storages decreases by one.

  In addition, although the 1st starting condition by a certain 1st starting prize is satisfied, the 1st starting condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 1st starting winning is not satisfied Variable indication corresponding to the 1st starting winning concerned Is stored (held) as hold data (first special-image hold information) until a first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the suspended first special-pattern suspension information is digested one by one each time the first start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the digested first-special-pattern suspension information is executed.

  The second special drawing reserve memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not executed immediately when the second start winning occurs and are temporarily suspended. Even if the second start condition for executing a variable display game such as a second special view game (described later) or a variable display of a decorative symbol is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start prize, the second start prize is generated If the second start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game described above is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established earlier is being When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a state of waiting for execution). In other words, the second special drawing reserve storage number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning that is in the execution waiting state. The number of second special map reservations is decreased by one each time one second start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the 2nd start condition by a certain 2nd start winning is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd start winning concerned with which the 2nd start condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 2nd starting winning combination is not satisfied Is stored (held) as hold data (second special-image hold information) until a second start condition for permitting the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held second special-image hold information is digested one by one each time the second start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the second special-character hold information to be digested is executed.

  The number of pending storages obtained by adding the number of first special view pending storages and the number of second special view pending storages is referred to as “total pending storage number”. In the case where the first special map reservation number, the second special image reservation number, and the total reservation number are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as “the number of special image reservations” or “the number of reservation memories”. That is, when simply referred to as "the number of special map holding storage" or "the number of holding storage", one or two of the first special drawing holding storage number, the second special drawing holding storage number, and the total holding storage number Or it may refer to three. Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as "start conditions" or "execution conditions". Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as “start conditions”. In addition, the first special view hold information and the second special view hold information are also simply referred to as "special view hold information" unless they are distinguished from each other.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 2 (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B). The special variable winning ball device 7 forms a big winning opening that changes to a closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter) and an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter). Specifically, the special variable winning prize ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door which is opened and closed by, for example, a solenoid 82 for a special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the state of the special winning opening by opening and closing the special winning opening door. Change (open, closed).

  As an example, the special variable winning prize ball device 7 closes the special winning opening door when the solenoid 82 is in the OFF state and closes the special winning opening, and opens the special winning hole door when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state. The big winning opening is open. The game ball which has passed (entered) the big winning opening in the open state is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. That is, by opening the special winning opening, winning to the special winning opening occurs.

  A predetermined number (for example, 12) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the occurrence of the winning on the big winning opening (detection of the game ball by the count switch 23). The number of prize balls (for example, 12) to be paid out based on the occurrence of the prize in the big prize winning opening is the number of prize balls to be paid out (for example, 3) based on the occurrence of the first start prize, The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of (for example, three) is greater. That is, the state of the special winning opening (opened state, closed state) greatly influences whether or not the player has an advantage. That is, when the special winning opening is in the open state, more winning balls can be expected compared to when the special winning opening is in the closing state, so when the special winning opening is in the opening state, the special winning opening is in the closing state It is very advantageous for the player compared to

  In addition to or in place of the closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter), a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) may be provided.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A is composed of, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of 7 segments or a dot matrix. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A variably displays (variable display) special symbols (also referred to as "special figures") that are plural types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. In addition, the special symbol (special figure) variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special view" or "special figure 1", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 4B (Special figure) is also referred to as "second special figure" or "special figure 2". Also, a game to be executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, a variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (a variable display game in which the first special view is variably displayed) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and a variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. (A variable display game in which the second special view is variably displayed) is also referred to as a second special view game. Moreover, when not distinguishing the 1st special figure game and the 2nd special figure game, it is also only called a "special figure game".

  The first special symbol display device 4A (same as the second special symbol display device 4B) is a special figure game, and includes a plurality of types including numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. The special symbol is displayed variably. Each special symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to each. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are attached to the respective numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are attached to the symbol indicating “−”. Just do it. In addition, a special symbol is not limited to what is comprised from the number which shows "0"-"9", the symbol which shows "-", etc. FIG. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as L and E of the alphabet) in which combinations of what are turned on and turned off in 7-segment LEDs are set in advance are set as special symbols. You may display it.

  A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2 (the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) . The first hold indicator 25A is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the number of first special view hold memories (the number of hold for the first special view game) based on the hold data (first special view hold information) A first pending display is made to display possible. For example, the first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first special view hold memories so as to be identifiable by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of reservations for the first special view game is increased by one due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the number of lights is increased by one, and the first special view game is suspended due to the establishment of a new first start condition When the number is reduced by one, the number of lights may be reduced by one. As described above, the expression "first hold display" is an operation based on the first special view hold information (the lighting control of the LED of the first hold indicator 25A, the first start winning storage display area 5HL (described later) In the case of pointing to the display itself based on the first special view suspension information (indication by the LED of the first suspension indicator 25A or the display in the first start winning storage display area 5HL (described later)) There is also. For example, the first hold display in the case where it is said that the first hold display is newly added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL (described later) indicates the newly added display itself. The same applies to "second hold display" and "active display" (described later).

  The second hold indicator 25B is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special view hold storage number (the number of pending for the second special view game) based on the hold data (second special view hold information) A second pending display is made to display possible. For example, the second hold indicator 25B displays the second special view hold storage number in a distinguishable manner by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of reservations for the second special view game is increased by one due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the number of lights is increased by one, and the second special view game is suspended due to the establishment of a new second start condition When the number is reduced by one, the number of lights may be reduced by one.

  When the first hold display and the second hold display are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as “hold display”.

  On the left side of the game area in the game board 2, a pass gate 41, a normal symbol display 20, and a common drawing hold display 25C are provided. The game ball having passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball which has passed the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the common drawing reserve memory number (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"), the normal symbol display 20 A common drawing start condition for executing a common drawing game (described later) to be executed in is established.

  The normal symbol display 20 is constituted by LEDs of 7 segments, a dot matrix, etc., similarly to the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The normal symbol display 20 variably displays (variable display) an ordinary symbol (also referred to as a “common figure” or “ordinary drawing”) which is plural types of identification information different from the special symbol. Note that a variable display game in which an ordinary symbol is variably displayed is also referred to as a common drawing game (or “normal drawing game”). In addition, the information regarding the common drawing game in which the common drawing start condition is satisfied but the common drawing start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as holding data (general drawing holding information).

  The common drawing hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays, for example, the common drawing hold storage number based on the held data (general drawing hold information) by the number of LEDs to be lit. The common drawing reserve memory number is the number of common drawing games whose execution is temporarily suspended without being executed immediately when the gaming ball having passed the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Even if the standard drawing start condition for executing the standard drawing game is satisfied by the detection of the gaming ball by the gate switch 21, the common drawing start condition for permitting the start of the common drawing game is not satisfied ( For example, when the spread game established earlier is in execution), the execution of the spread game is suspended (the spread game is in a state of waiting for execution). That is, the common drawing reserve memory number is the number of games of the common drawing game which is in the state of waiting for execution. The common drawing reserve storage number decreases by one each time one common drawing start condition is satisfied.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is configured of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol display area is arranged. In the decorative symbol display area, decorative symbols, which are plural types of identification information capable of identifying each, are variably displayed. The variable display of the decorative design is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 5 is a first special figure game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (a special figure game using the first special figure) or a second special figure executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the game (special drawing game using the second special drawing), variable display of a plurality of kinds of decorative designs is executed in the display area (decorative display area).

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 1, in the display area of the image display device 5, decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" are arranged. In response to the start of the special view game (the first special view game or the second special view game), that is, in response to the start of the change of the special view (the first special view or the second special view) In each of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of the decorative pattern (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. After that, in response to the end of the special figure game, that is, in response to the stop display of the special figure, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, a decorative symbol (finalized decorative symbol, final The stop symbol (also referred to as a stop symbol) is displayed in a stop state. That is, in the display area of the image display device 5 (the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R), the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with (correspondence to) the first special drawing game (or the second special drawing game). The finalized decorative symbol (also referred to as a final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed. The decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 5L is also referred to as the left symbol, the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 5C is referred to as the middle symbol, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 5R is also referred to as the right symbol.

  The decorative pattern is composed of, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters, Chinese numerals, alphabets, figures, character images related to predetermined motifs, etc.). Each decorative symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to the respective decorative symbol. As an example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” may be attached to the decorative symbols of alphanumeric characters “1” to “8”, respectively. In addition, a decorative pattern is not limited to eight types, Any number may be sufficient (for example, seven types, nine types, etc.).

  In addition, the fixed display which is the stop display of the finalized special symbol which is the fixed display which is the variable display result of special symbol (also referred to as the special display display result) and which ends the variable display, the fixed display which is the variable display result of decoration Stop display to stop the variable display and to display the fixed display which stops the variable display by stopping display of the fixed normal pattern which is the variable display result of the normal design (also referred to as common drawing display result) Also referred to as a complete stop indication, a final stop indication, or a derived indication (or simply "derived"). In addition, the fluctuation start timing and the fluctuation end timing of the decorative symbol may not necessarily coincide with the fluctuation start timing and the fluctuation end timing of the special symbol, and within the fluctuation time of the special symbol (special pattern fluctuation time), the decorative symbol The fluctuation time of should be settled.

  That is, the variation start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the variation start timing of the special symbol, or the variation end timing of the special symbol (stop display timing of the determined special symbol) is the variation end timing of the decorative symbol (of the determined ornament symbol It may be later than the stop display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the display of the finalized decorative symbol is stopped, and the finalized special symbol may be stopped when the predetermined effect is finished.

  In addition, in the display area of the image display device 5, stop display different from the complete stop display (final stop display, derivation display) may be performed. For example, temporary stop display may be performed in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started until the finalized decorative symbol is derived and displayed. Specifically, for example, when a predetermined effect (for example, a slip effect (described later), a pseudo continuous effect (described later), a relottery effect (described later), or the like) is performed, temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, temporary stop display of a decorative symbol may be performed as what constitutes a part of the above-mentioned predetermined effect, and temporary stop display of a decorative symbol may be performed with execution of the above-mentioned predetermined effect. That is, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol may be regarded as a part of the predetermined effect, or may be regarded as being different from the predetermined effect. In the temporary stop display, the decorative symbol whose fluctuation speed has become "0", for example, is displayed while causing slight shaking, expansion and contraction, etc., or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, one second) It includes things that are stopped and displayed without causing time, slight shaking or stretching.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, a first start winning storage display area 5HL and a second start winning storage display area 5HR are arranged. In the first start winning combination storage display area 5HL, as in the first suspension display 25A, a first suspension display is performed to display the first special map suspension storage number in an identifiable manner. That is, the number of first special drawing games currently suspended for execution is displayed in an identifiable manner. In the first start winning storage display area 5HL, as in the second storage display 25B, a second storage display is performed to display the second special map storage number in a specifiable manner. That is, the number of second special drawing games currently suspended for execution is displayed in an identifiable manner.

  In the first start winning combination storage display area 5HL, for example, the first hold display may be performed right-justified. That is, when the number of reservations for the first special view game is increased due to the establishment of the new first start condition, if there is no other first suspension display in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the first starting winning storage display A new first hold display is added on the right side of area 5HL (center side of the display area of image display device 5) as a hold display corresponding to the first special view hold information for the increased amount, and the first start prize storage display area 5HL If there is another first pending display in the above, the new first pending on the left side of the other first pending display (more than the other left first pending display if there are multiple other first pending displays) A display may be added. In addition, when there are a plurality of first suspension displays in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, when the number of suspension of the first special view game decreases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first reduction The first hold display (the first hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning storage display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special view hold information is erased, Each of the other first pending displays is shifted (shifted) to the erased first pending display side (right side).

  Further, in the second start winning combination storage display area 5HR, for example, the second hold display may be performed left-justified. That is, when the number of reservations for the second special view game increases due to the establishment of a new second start condition, if there is no other second suspension display in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, the second starting winning storage display A new second hold display is added on the left side of area 5HR (center side of the display area of image display device 5) as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special view hold information, and second start winning storage display area 5HR If there is another second pending display in the above, the new second pending on the right side of the other second pending display (more than the other right second pending display if there are multiple other second pending displays) A display may be added. In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold display in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, when the number of holdings of the second special view game decreases due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second of the decrease amount The second hold display (the second hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning storage display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special view hold information is erased, Each of the other second hold display is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side).

  When the first start winning storage display area 5HL and the second start winning storage display area 5HR are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as "start winning storage display area 5H".

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, an active display area (also referred to as a current display area, an active hold display area, a display time display area, etc.) AHA is disposed. In the active display area, active display (also referred to as digest display, current display, etc.) is displayed based on elimination of the hold display from the start winning storage display area 5H due to the establishment of the start condition. For example, when the first start condition is met, the first hold display displayed on the far right of the first start winning storage display area 5HL moves (shifts) to the active display area AHA and the active display is displayed, and the second start is performed. When the condition is satisfied, the second hold display displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning storage display area 5HR moves (shifts) to the active display area AHA, and the active display is displayed. The display mode of the pending display immediately before moving (shifting) to the active display area AHA may be different from the display mode of the active display immediately after moving (shifting) to the active display area AHA. That is, when shifting to the active display, the display mode may change. Hereinafter, the active indication displayed based on the certain pending indication M being erased may also be referred to as the active indication corresponding to the pending indication M. That is, "corresponding" in "the active display corresponding to the hold display" means that the active display takes over at least a part of the hold display when the variable display such as a decorative pattern is started by the stop display disappearing. It is a concept that includes being displayed in a similar manner to that displayed on the screen or displayed in a similar manner to the suspended display (for example, when the same character is drawn).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the active display area AHA is disposed between the first start winning storage display area 5HL and the second start winning storage display area 5HR, as shown in FIG. The active display area AHA may be disposed at any position in the display area of the image display device 5.

  In the game area of the game board 2, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings can be provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. It may be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as winning balls based on the fact that the game balls entering any of the general winning openings are detected by the predetermined general winning ball switch. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the lower right portion of the gaming machine frame 3 is provided a striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to fire a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward the gaming area. For example, the hit ball operating handle adjusts the resilience of the gaming ball according to the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by the player or the like. The hitting control handle may be provided with a single-shot release switch for stopping the drive of the firing motor provided in the hit shooting device or a touch ring (touch sensor).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball and a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device (stored ) Is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower tray is provided which holds (retains) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper tray so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 31A which can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member forming the lower tray, for example, at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). There is. The stick controller 31A includes an operating rod held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operating rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is hit when the player holds the operating rod). There is. The trigger button can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operation finger (for example, index finger or the like) while the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with the operation hand (for example, left hand or the like) It should just be comprised. Inside the operating rod, a trigger sensor may be incorporated so as to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button.

  A tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower tray at the lower part of the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit may be two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) disposed parallel to the board of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod as viewed from the player facing the pachinko game machine 1 Four transmission types combining the pair) and two transmission type photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged vertically to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation stick viewed from the player's side It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

  The member forming the upper tray is, for example, a push button 31B which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). It is provided. The push button 31B may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by the player or the like. A push sensor may be provided inside the main body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 31B or the like to detect the operation performed by the player on the push button 31B.

  An audio output member is provided in the periphery of the game area of the game machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 8UL and 8UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speakers 8LL and 8LR are installed at the lower left and right lower portions of the upper plate (the lower left and right oblique upper portions). It has been installed. Hereinafter, when the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR are not particularly distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as the speaker 8. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs a rendering sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 and outputs a warning sound according to the situation of the gaming machine 1.

  The effect sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound and the like. The music in the effect sound is, for example, BGM, a song or the like which is output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice (serif, a message) or the like which is output according to a detection result by a switch or a sensor (for example, detection of winning on the first start winning opening etc). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice, or the like that is output in response to an operation act on the push button 31B. In addition, since the operation act on the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound outputted in response to the operation act on the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the presentation sound is, for example, a sound to notify of requesting an operation action to the push button 31B, a voice, a sound to notify transition to the reach state at the time of transition of the reach state (described later), a voice or These are sounds, voices, and the like for giving notice or suggestion to shift to the big hit gaming state before shifting to the big hit gaming state.

  An example of the warning sound is a warning sound output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound output when the glass door (not shown) is opened, etc. .

  In the inside and the periphery of the game area of the game machine frame 3, movable movable objects (movable bodies) are provided which operate as effects or decorations. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the first position (the initial position shown in FIG. 1) to the second position (the lower position; for example, the position of the front of the display area of the image display device 5) at the upper position of the image display device 5. A movable movable object 17 is provided that can move up and down.

  Further, light emitting members (light emitters) that emit light as effects or decorations are provided in the inside and the periphery of the game area of the game machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the light emitting member 9CC is installed on the movable part 17, the light emitting member 9CL and the light emitting member 9CR are installed on the left and right positions of the image display device 5, and the light emitting member is installed on the upper position of the gaming machine frame 3. A light emitting member 9SL and a light emitting member 9SR are installed at the left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3 9U. Hereinafter, the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR are collectively referred to as a lamp 9 unless otherwise specified. The lamp 9 may be configured of, for example, one or more LEDs, or may be configured of a flash lamp. The light emitting member 9U may be a rotary lamp (for example, a lamp lamp) having a rotary unit. In addition to the above, for example, various light emitting members may be installed around each structure (for example, the special variable winning prize ball device 7 etc.) in the game area.

  Although the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the movable character 17 described above are effect devices that execute effects, the game machine 1 may be, for example, a device having a vibration unit, another device such as a device having a blower unit, etc. A device may be provided.

  In addition, the arrangement position (installation position) of each structure is an example, Comprising: You may be arrange | positioned in another position. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol indicator 20 may be provided on the same side (right side or left side) of the game area. Also, for example, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the common view hold indicator 25C may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the fact that the normal drawing start condition is satisfied after the normal drawing start condition is satisfied, the normal drawing game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. In the regular game, after starting the variable display of the normal symbol (after starting the variation of the normal symbol), when the predetermined time which becomes the common drawing variation time passes, the determined normal symbol which becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol Stop display (derivative display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per common figure) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per common figure". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is “general symbol lost” Become. In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per common drawing", the enlargement and release control (tilting control) in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip forming the variable winning prize ball device 6B is tilted is performed The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the establishment of the first start condition after the establishment of the first start condition, the special figure game (first special view game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. A special drawing game (second special drawing game) by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the establishment of the second starting condition after the starting condition is established. In the special figure game, after the start of the variable display of the special symbol (after the start of the variation of the special symbol), when the variable display time as the special figure fluctuation time passes, the finalized variable result of the special symbol is determined Derivate and display the symbol (special drawing display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" as a specific display result, and a special symbol different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol. It is a loss. In addition, if a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be a "small hit" as a predetermined display result.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are the big hit symbols, and the special symbols indicating the symbol “-” are the lost symbols. In addition, each symbol such as big hit symbol in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A and lost symbol will be a special symbol different from each symbol in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B The special symbol common to both of the special figure games may be a big hit symbol and a lost symbol.

  After the variable display result in the special view game becomes "big hit", the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state which is the specific gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 controls the big prize winning opening formed by the special variable winning prize ball device 7 in the open state in the big hit gaming state. The big hit game state in which the big winning opening is controlled to the open state is an example of the advantageous state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to a small hit gaming state which is a special gaming state different from the big hit gaming state.

  Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a predetermined round (also referred to as "round game") advantageous to the player in the big hit gaming state after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit". Execute the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). The round is the opening cycle of the big winning opening. The pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the state (opened state, closed state) of the special winning opening by opening and closing the special winning opening door of the special variable winning prize ball device 7 in each round (each round). For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 opens the big winning opening door at the start of the round, changes the big winning opening from the closing state to the opening state, maintains the big winning opening in the opening state, and then closes the big winning opening door. The big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, and one round is ended.

  It should be noted that instead of opening the big winning opening door immediately at the start of the round and changing the big winning opening from the closed state to the open state, the big winning opening is closed without immediately opening the big winning opening door at the start of the round. It is also possible to maintain it, and then open the big winning opening door to change the big winning opening from the closed state to the open state. Also, instead of closing the big winning opening door at the end of the round and changing the big winning opening from the open state to the closing state, the winning opening door is closed to change the big winning opening from the opening state to the closing state. It is good also as an aspect which maintains and, after that, finishes a round.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the big winning opening to the open state once in one round (in one round, changes the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state). The pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the big winning opening to an open state a plurality of times per round. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the big winning opening to the open state twice in one round (in the single round, the big winning opening is open → closed → open → closed) May change with the state).

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 repeatedly executes the rounds in the big hit gaming state until the number of rounds execution reaches a predetermined upper limit number. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes the round according to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball does not win a prize winning opening etc.) even before the number of times the round is executed reaches the predetermined upper limit number of times. You may complete the

  Note that the predetermined upper limit number of times may be one type (e.g., always ten times) or a plurality of types. For example, the predetermined upper limit number may be any number selected (lottery) from among a plurality of types of numbers (for example, two times, eight times, and sixteen times).

  For the special winning opening in the round, either a predetermined upper limit opening time elapses after opening the special winning opening door, or a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winnings to the special winning opening occur. It is kept open until it is established. Note that the predetermined upper limit opening time may be one type (for example, always 29 seconds) or a plurality of types. For example, the predetermined upper limit opening time may be any time selected (lottery) from among a plurality of types of time (for example, 0.1 seconds, 29 seconds).

  In the round, the winning opening is kept closed (closed state in the round) until a predetermined time (closed period) elapses. For example, in the case where the big winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state and the round is started, the big winning opening is closed until the predetermined time (closing period) elapses after the big winning opening door is closed. It is kept closed for a period. Also, for example, in a mode in which the round starts while maintaining the big winning opening in a closed state, the big winning opening is in a closing state until a predetermined time (closing period) elapses after the start of the round. Maintained. The predetermined time (closed period) may be of one type (e.g., always 3 seconds) or may be of multiple types. For example, the predetermined time (closing period) may be any time selected (lottery) from among a plurality of types of time (for example, 1 second, 3 seconds).

  From the above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes, for example, eight rounds of changing the big winning opening from open (29 seconds) to closed (3 seconds) in the big hit gaming state, or opens the big winning opening. Execute each round changing the status (29 seconds) → closed status (3 seconds) 16 times or open the big winning opening (0.1 second) → closed status (1 second) → open status (0.1) Each round may be performed twice, changing from s) to closed state (1 s). Also, the pachinko gaming machine 1 opens the big winning opening after executing each round eight times in which the big winning opening is changed from the opening state (29 seconds) to the closing state (3 seconds) in the big hit gaming state. It is also possible to execute eight rounds each time changing from 1 second to closed state (1 second).

  In addition, among the rounds in the jackpot gaming state, the round where the upper limit open time is relatively long (for example, the round where the open state is 29 seconds) is also referred to as the normal open round, and the upper limit open time is relatively short round (for example, open The round where the state is 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short open round.

  In addition, among the special symbols which are the big hit symbols, the big hit symbols corresponding to the normal opening round (the big hit symbols controlled to the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed later) may be referred to as the normal opening round big hit symbol . Among the special symbols that are jackpot symbols, a jackpot symbol corresponding to a short opening round (a jackpot symbol controlled to a jackpot gaming state in which a short opening round is executed later) may be referred to as a short opening round jackpot symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state (normally open big hit state) controlled after the normal opening round big hit symbol is derived as the determined special symbol in the special figure game, the normal opening round is executed a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). In addition, in the big hit gaming state (short-term opening big-hit state) controlled after the short-term opening round big hit symbol is derived as a final special symbol in the special figure game, the short-term opening round is executed a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds) Ru. In addition, if the number of executions of the normal opening round is larger in the normal opening big hit state compared to the short opening big hit state, the short opening round is executed in addition to the normal opening round in the normal opening big hit state. In the jackpot state, a normal opening round may be performed in addition to the short-term opening round.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a value obtained by the player in each big hit gaming state as a big hit gaming state controlled after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, ie, the game It is possible to prepare (implement) various jackpot gaming states in which the degree of advantage (for example, the number of winning balls (number of playing balls)) seen from the player is made different.

  As an example when not using the short-term opening round, the round which is more advantageous for the player than the big hit gaming state which executes 8 rounds (normal opening round) 8 rounds which is a big hit gaming state which executes 8 round It is possible to prepare a jackpot gaming state that executes (normally open round) 16 times. In the above example, if there is no difference in the number of times the special winning opening is changed to the open state in each round (normally open round) or the time of the respective open state (open time) In the big hit gaming state to be executed 16 times, it is possible to expect twice as many balls out of the big hit gaming state to execute round (normally open round) 8 times.

  As an example in the case of using the short-term opening round, the big hit gaming state (mainly 8 round big hit gaming state) which executes the short opening round eight times after executing the normal opening round eight times and the big hit gaming state substantially eight rounds It is possible to prepare a jackpot gaming state which is advantageous to the player and performs 16 times of the normal opening round. In the above example, there is no difference in the number of times the big winning opening is changed to the open state in each normal open round, and the time (open time) of each open state, and the number of balls obtained in the short open round If the jackpot is small enough to be ignored, in the jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed 16 times, it is possible to expect twice as many balls as the jackpot gaming state of the real eight rounds.

  In addition, even if the upper limit opening time has not elapsed after opening the special winning opening door, if a predetermined number of winning to the special winning opening occurs, the special winning opening changes from the opening state to the closing state, The value obtained by the player may be made different by providing a predetermined number of differences. For example, the jackpot gaming state in which eight regular opening rounds (opening time is 29 seconds) with the predetermined number of five is performed, and eight normal opening rounds (opening time is 29 seconds) with the predetermined number of five. A jackpot gaming state may be prepared in which eight predetermined opening rounds (opening time is 29 seconds) having the predetermined number of 10, which is more advantageous for the player than the jackpot execution state executed once, may be prepared.

  In addition, the value obtained by the player may be made different by providing a difference in the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of the winning on the big winning opening. For example, the player is more advantageous than the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot gaming state in which the number of prize balls is six is executed 16 times and the jackpot state in which the prize balls number is six is performed 16 times; A big hit gaming state may be prepared in which a normal opening round with 12 winning balls is executed 16 times.

  Also, in addition to the value that the player gets from the big hit gaming state itself (the value that the player gets during the big hit gaming state), the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is controlled after the big hit gaming state, Value to be obtained by the player after the big hit gaming state by changing the length of the period (for example, the number of times reduced, the number of ST times) during which the playing state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled after the big hit gaming state is maintained different. May be different.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled after becoming an 8R probability variation big hit (described later) as a big hit gaming state controlled after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”. There are a big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed eight times, and a big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round controlled after becoming the 16R probability variation big hit (described later) is executed sixteen times.

  In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R arranged in the display area of the image display 5, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B In response to the start of any special drawing game among the games, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is variable during a period from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when variable display is ended by stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be in the predetermined reach state which constitutes a part of the combination of a display.

  With the reach state, a decorative symbol (also referred to as a "reach variation symbol") that is not displayed in a stopped state when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes part of a big hit combination Is a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or some of the decorative symbols are fluctuated synchronously while constituting all or a part of the big hit combination. In the following description, reaching the reach state is also referred to as reaching.

  Further, in response to the reaching state, the variation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative symbol is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or, by changing the display mode of the background image, reproducing and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern, or changing the fluctuation mode of the decorative pattern, a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state is executed. May be A rendering operation such as display of a character image or change in display mode of a background image, reproduction display of a moving image, or change in change mode of a decorative pattern is referred to as reach effect (or reach effect display). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8, the light emission operation of the lamp 9 (off, blinking, lighting, etc.), the operation of the movable part 17 (still, Fine movement, movement and the like may be included in an operation mode different from the operation mode before reaching the reach state.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the rendering pattern, the possibility that the big hit combination and the like will be finally stopped and displayed after the reach effect may be made different (also referred to as “big hit expectation” or “big hit reliability”). As a result, it is possible to make the jackpot expectation different according to which one of the plurality of reach effects is performed, that is, according to which reach effect is to be generated. As an example, in the present embodiment, the reach mode of the normal reach and the reach mode of the super reach having a high jackpot expectation degree higher than the normal reach are set (prepared) in advance.

  In addition, the jackpot expectation degree by a certain production is, for example, (probability that the production will be executed at the big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) / {(probability of the presentation being performed at the big hit) × (probability of the big hit) It is calculated by + (probability that the effect is executed other than the big hit time) × (probability of not becoming a big hit). In addition, when a certain effect is executed, when it always becomes a "big hit", the big hit expectation degree of the effect is "1". The same is true for the super reach expectation degree by a certain effect.

  In addition, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, as one aspect of the variable display effect, it is possible to execute a slip effect, a pseudo continuous effect, or the like which is realized by a variable display operation such as the decorative symbol. The slip effect is an effect of displaying variably the decorative symbol displayed temporarily after displaying the decorative symbol temporarily in a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in one special drawing game, Alternatively, it is an effect of re-variably displaying a part of the decorative symbol that has been temporarily stopped after temporarily displaying the decorative symbol temporarily in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. According to the slip effect, the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop display can be changed to another symbol, so that it can appear as if, for example, the reach state is reached from the non-reach state.

  The pseudo series effect re-displays the decorative symbol that has been temporarily stopped after temporarily stopping the decorative symbol in a part or all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in one special figure game. It is an effect that The re-variable display in the pseudo series effect can be performed a plurality of times (for example, up to four times) for one special drawing game.

  The number of times of re-variable display (re-variable display number) in the pseudo-sequence effect is the number of variable display (first variable display) until all the decorative patterns in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R first stop temporarily. The number of times (one time) of re-variable display (final variable display) after the temporary stop of all decorative symbols last and the number of times of re-variable display between the first variable display and the last variable display X X is grasped as the number of times (X + 1) smaller by one time than the number of times (X + 2) of adding 0 and 1 or more. Further, the number of times of re-variable display is the same as the number (temporary stop number) at which all decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Further, the number of re-variable display in the pseudo-series effect is also referred to as the number of pseudo-sequences (or the number of pseudo-series variation). That is, the number of times of pseudo run, the number of times of re-variable display, and the number of times of temporary stop are the same. The increase in the number of times of pseudo run to the first time, the second time, the third time, and so on is also referred to as "the pseudo run continues".

  In the variable display effect of "pseudo ream", re-variable display (re-variation) is performed 1 to 4 times, and based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once, the decorative symbol is variable It can appear as if the display started two to five times in a row. In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which re-variable display (re-variation) is performed once or twice (see FIG. 5), but re-variable display (re-variation) may be performed three or more times.

  In addition, a pseudo ream may be performed before reach establishment, and may be performed after reach establishment. That is, in the pseudo-series effect, the temporary stop display may be performed before the reach state, or the temporary stop display may be performed after the reach state.

  The slip effect (as well as the pseudo-sequence effect) is a notice to the player of the possibility of any reach effect or a certain reach effect being performed, and that the big hit expectation is high. It is also good. Hereinafter, a player may be notified of an indication that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed, that the jackpot expectation is high, etc.

  Note that a variable display effect (variable display operation) different from the slip effect and the pseudo continuous effect may be executed as the advance effect. For example, fluctuation start timing (for example, when left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol start to change at the same time, timing to start the change simultaneously, and left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol do not start to change simultaneously) The effect of changing the start of the first change of the pattern, etc.) is different from the normal time, and the effect of changing the start order of the left, middle, and right patterns from the normal time is noticeably produced. It may be executed as In addition, display operations other than the variable display operation may be performed as advance notice effects. For example, an effect of making the background image different from that at the normal time or an effect of making the hold display different from that at the normal time may be executed as the advance effect. The advance notice effect may be an operation other than the display operation. For example, the advance notice effect may be due to voice output by the speaker 8, light emission of the lamp 9, operation of the movable role thing 17 or the like.

  In addition, the notification (prediction, suggestion) by the advance presentation effect may be performed before the player recognizes whether the notification content is realized. For example, the advance notice effect notifying the possibility of reaching the reach state may be performed as long as it is performed before the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, the notice effect for notifying the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" may be performed as long as it is performed before the finalized decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Among the advance notice effects, it is sufficient that what is to be the advance read notice effect (also referred to as “pre-decision notice effect”) is included. Prior read advance notice effect determines whether the variable display result is "big hit" based on the hold information etc. of the special drawing game before starting the variable display to be the advance notice target. (Pre-reading), it is the announcement production which is executed on the basis of the decision result. In the following description, the pending information targeted for the pre-reading preview effect is referred to as pending information of the target, the pending display corresponding to the pending information of the target is referred to as pending display of the target, and the variable display corresponding to the pending information of the target It is also called variable target display. In addition, the preread advance notice effect is executed during the digestion of the pending information of the target (when executed during the digesting process of the pending information of the target including variable display of the target) and before the pending information of the target There are a case where it is performed while digesting the hold information, and a case where it is performed while digesting the hold information of the target and during the digest of the hold information before the hold information of the target.

  In addition, as a pre-reading advance notice effect, a hold effect by a display mode of a first hold display in the first start winning storage display area 5HL or a second hold display in the second start pay storage display area 5HR may be prepared. For the hold effect, a first hold display to be added to the first start winning memory display area 5HL when the first start winning is generated, and a second hold display to be added to the second start winning memory display area 5HR when the second start winning is generated. The effect of displaying in the notice mode (additional hold effect), or the first hold display or the second hold display that has already been displayed changes to a notice mode (including a change from one notice mode to another notice mode. , Etc.) and effects to be performed when the first hold display and the second hold display change to the notice mode, and characters and the like are directly displayed on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5 It is an effect to be acted on in an indirect or indirect manner (hold action effect), or an effect to be performed when the first hold display or the second hold display does not change to the notice mode, and a character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 on hold Shown directly or indirectly effect to act on (hold action Gase effect) may be included, such as. In addition, when the pending action effect is executed, the display mode of the first pending display (or the second pending display) to be acted changes, but when the pending action gasse effect is executed, the first pending display (or The display mode of the second hold display does not change.

  Moreover, the active display effect by the display mode of the active display in active display area AHA may be prepared as a preliminary production. In the active display effect, an effect that displays the active display to be added to the active display area AHA in the notice mode (active display effect at the time of addition) or the active display that has already been displayed changes to the notice mode (from one notice mode to another This includes the change to the advance notice mode (the same applies hereinafter) and the effect to be executed when the active display changes to the advance notice mode, and the character etc. is activated in the display area of the image display device 5 An effect (active display effect effect) to act directly or indirectly on the display, or an effect to be performed when the active display does not change to the advance notice mode, and a character or the like is displayed on the display area of the image display device 5 as an active display. Directed or indirectly operated effects (active display effect cassette effect) etc. are included Good. When the active display action effect is executed, the display mode of the active display which is the action target changes, but when the active display action effect is performed, the display mode of the active display does not change.

  The display mode of the active display in the active display effect may be determined before the change (for example, at the start winning), or may be determined at the change. In addition, there are also cases where a combination of a hold effect and an active display effect is referred to as a hold effect or the like.

  When a special symbol to be a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a determined special symbol in the special drawing game, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the variable display of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state In some cases, the finalized decoration pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of a decorative symbol is referred to as a "non-reach" (also referred to as a "normal loss") variable display mode when the variable display result is "loss".

  When the special symbol to be the lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a final symbol in the special figure game, the variable symbol state of the decorative symbol is reached after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Depending on the situation, after the reach effect is performed, the finalized decoration pattern to be a predetermined reach loss combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of a decorative symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "loss".

  In the present embodiment, as a determined special symbol in the special figure game, among the special symbols (special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5” and “7”) that become the big hit symbol, the special symbol indicating the number “3” When the special symbol indicating the symbol or the number of "5" is stopped and displayed, it becomes "8R probability variation big hit" which is one aspect of "big hit". Also, when the special symbol indicating the number of "7" is stopped and displayed, it becomes "16R probability variation big hit" which is one aspect of "big hit". The round controlled at the time of 8R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big hit is usually an open round. That is, in the present embodiment, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5” and “7” is a normally open round jackpot symbol.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the special symbol which shows the number of "5" is stopped and displayed as mentioned above, it becomes 8R probability variation big hit, but when the special symbol which shows the number of "5" is stopped and displayed It may be made to become "2R probability variation big hit (also referred to as" probability ")" in which a short-term opening round is executed. The special symbol indicating the number of "5" in this case is a short-term open round big hit symbol (also referred to as a sudden symbol). In "big hit", "8R probability variation big hit", "16R probability variation big hit", and "2R probability variation big hit" are called "big hit type".

  Specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed in the case of the 16R probability variation big hit, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the reach state is reached and the predetermined reach effect is achieved. After being executed, etc., the finalized decoration pattern to be a big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. An example of a big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit is the same decorative symbol with an odd symbol number on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line horizontally) formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R A row of three (ie, ones with “1”, “1”, “1”, “3”, “3”, “3”, “5”, “5”, “ It is the one that is lined with "5," the one that is lined with "7," "7," and "7

  Specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number of "3" or "5" is stopped and displayed in the case of the 8R probability variation big hit, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the reach state is reached and predetermined After the reach effect of is executed, the finalized decoration pattern to be a big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. An example of a big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation big hit is one in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged with an even numbered symbol number on a predetermined effective line formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R ( That is, those arranged in line with “2”, “2”, “2”, those arranged in “4”, “4”, “4”, those arranged in “6”, “6”, “6”, “8”, “8”, “8” and so on).

  In this embodiment, 2R probability variation big hit is not provided, but when it is set as 2R probability variation big hit when it becomes 2R probability variation big hit, variable indication of the decoration design is started, reaches reach state and specified reach After the rendition is executed or the like, or without reaching a reach state, the finalized decoration symbol to be a big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit may be stopped and displayed. An example of a big hit combination corresponding to a 2R probability variation big hit is an odd numbered symbol number on the predetermined effective line formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and a different decorative symbol (one of at least three) A set of three decorative designs with different patterns (for example, "1", "3", "5", "3", "5", "7", "5", "5", "7" Or a combination including a predetermined decorative pattern (for example, a combination of “1”, “probability”, “2”, etc.).

  In addition, when the special symbol which shows the number of “7” is stopped and displayed in the special figure game, when the fixed decoration symbol which becomes the big hit combination which corresponds to 16R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed, 8R probability variation on the surface There may be a case where the finalized decoration pattern to be the big hit combination corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed.

  Based on the 16R probability variation big hit, the normal release round is controlled 16 times (round) to be executed to the normal release big hit state, and after that, time variation control (time shortening control) and probability variation control (probability fluctuation control ) Is done. In addition, based on the 8R probability variation hit, the normal release round is controlled to a normally open jackpot state in which eight rounds are executed, and after that, probability variation control is performed together with time saving control.

  By performing the probability change control, the probability that the variable display result will be a "big hit" in the special figure game each time is improved to be higher than when the probability change control is not performed. The probability change control is one of the conditions when the special figure game of a predetermined number of STs (also referred to as the number of probability changes) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state, and when the variable display result is "big hit". End when it is first established. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become "big hit" when the probability change control is being performed, the probability change control finish. The predetermined number of times of ST is, for example, 70 times.

  Further, by performing the time reduction control, the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the case where the time reduction control is not performed. In the time-saving control, after the big hit gaming state is over, when a predetermined time-saving number of special drawing games are executed and the variable display result is a "big hit", either condition is established first. To finish. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become a "big hit" when the time-saving control is being performed, the time-saving control ends when the predetermined number of time-saving special drawing games have been consumed. Note that the predetermined time reduction number is, for example, 70 times.

  When time saving control is performed, the control for shortening the variation time of the normal symbol in the regular drawing game with the regular symbol display 20 (general drawing variation time) is shorter than that when the time reducing control is not performed, or Control to improve the probability that the variable display result of the symbol will be "per common drawing" than when time saving control is not performed, the variable display result is "per common drawing" based on the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B based on The game ball has a second start winning game such as control to make tilt control time to perform tilt control of the movable wing piece longer than when time reduction control is not performed, and control to increase the number of tilts than when time reduction control is not performed. A control that is advantageous to the player is performed by making it easy to pass through (enter) the mouth and increasing the possibility that the second start condition is established. As described above, the control that facilitates the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening with the time saving control and is advantageous for the player is also referred to as high open control. As high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

  By performing the high open control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the wide open state is increased more than when the high open control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is likely to be satisfied, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the next variable display result The time until the "big hit" is reduced. The period during which the high release control can be performed is also referred to as a high release control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed.

  The gaming state in which both time saving control and high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state. In addition, the gaming state in which the probability change control is performed is also referred to as a high probability state or a probability change state. The short time state (high base state) and the high certainty state (probable state) are examples of advantageous states advantageous to the player.

  A game state in which time reduction control and high opening control are performed together with probability change control, that is, a game state in a high probability state (probability state) and also in a high base state (time reduction state) is a high probability high base state or time reduction probability state Also called. The game state in which only time change control is performed and time reduction control and high opening control are not performed, that is, the game state which is a high probability state (probability state) but not a high base state (time reduction state) is a high probability low base state It is also referred to as a timeless nondeterministic state. In addition, only the high certainty high base state (time reduction attached definite change state) may be called "probable change state". A gaming state in which time reduction control or high opening control is performed without probability change control being performed, that is, a gaming state in which the high base state (time reduction state) is not a high probability state (probability state), is also referred to as a low probability high base state Be done. The game state in which time change control is not performed and time saving control or high opening control is not performed, that is, the game state in neither high probability state (probability state) nor high base state (time reduction state) is also referred to as low probability low base state Be done. The low probability low base state is a normal state in which neither probability change control nor short time control nor high open control is performed. Therefore, the low probability low base state is distinguished from high probability high base status, high probability low base status, low probability high base status, etc. It may be called "normal state". In addition, the gaming state which is not the big hit gaming state may be referred to as the "normal state" in distinction from the big hitting gaming state. The initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the state after the initialization process is performed after the power is turned on as in the case where the system reset is performed) is the normal state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that the 8R probability variation big hit or the 16R probability variation big hit, it is controlled to the normally open big hit state, and after that, a predetermined number of times (for example 70 times), high probability high base Controlled by the state.

  In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions after the big hit (8R positive variation big hit, 16R positive variation big hit) and the ST number (positive variation number of times) are the same (both 70 times), but the big hit (8R positive variation big hit, 16R It is also possible to make the number of time reductions after becoming the probability variation big hit different from the number of times of ST (number of probability variation). Further, in the present embodiment, the number of STs after the 8R probability variation big hit (the probability variation number) and the ST number after the 16R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variations) are the same (both 70 times), but the 8R probability variation The number of STs after the big hit (the number of definite variations) may be different from the number of STs after the 16R certainty variation hit (the number of certain variations). Further, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions after becoming an 8R probability variation big hit and the time reduction number after becoming a 16R probability variation big hit are the same (both 70 times), but the time reduction number after becoming an 8R probability variation big hit And the number of time savings after becoming a 16R probability variation big hit may be made different.

  In the present embodiment, 2R probability variation big hit is not provided, but when 2R probability variation big hit is provided, short term opening round is executed twice (round) based on having become 2R probability variation big hit. The state change control may be performed along with the time-saving control, as in the case of the 16R positive variation big hit or the 8R high probability big hit after being controlled to the state.

  In the present embodiment, even when the variable display result does not become a "big hit" when the probability variation control is being performed, if the special figure game of the predetermined ST number (number of probability variations) is digested. Although the probability change control is ended, the probability change control may not be ended until the variable display result becomes “big hit” without providing the ST number (number of probability changes). That is, a probability variation big hit may be provided to continue the probability variation control until the next big hit. When providing a positive variation big hit that continues the positive variation control until the next big hit, a normal big hit may not be provided after the termination. For example, the normal opening round is controlled to a normal opening big hit state which is executed eight times (round), and after that, the probability change control is not performed (time reduction control or high opening control may or may not be performed ), 8R normal jackpot may be provided.

  In addition, when the decision "with probability change fall" is made to end the high certainty state in the probability change fall lottery which is executed each time the special figure game is started after the end of the big hit game state, the probability change control is ended You may When such a mode is adopted, the special game with a predetermined number of STs (number of definite variations) is not broken until the special figure game of a predetermined number of STs (number of definite variations) is digested without performing a probability change fall lottery. In each game, a random change lottery may be made. The same applies to time saving control and high release control.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed for the decorative pattern. For example, as a re-lottery effect, after displaying temporarily stop display of a decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to 8R probability variation big hit in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, it is changed again with the same decorative symbol aligned Alternatively, one of a decorative pattern that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit and an ornament pattern that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 8R positive variation big hit may be displayed as a final decoration symbol as a final decoration display. In the present embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided, but when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, the same applies to a temporary stop display of a decorative pattern which is a big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit.

  In addition, after the finalized decoration pattern to be a big hit combination corresponding to 8R probability variation big hit is derived and displayed, the period until the end of the eighth round (or after the end of the eighth round, the next variable display game is In the period until it is started, the round number promotion effect may be performed to notify that the big hit is a 16R probability variation big hit. In the present embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided, but when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, the same applies to the case in which a definite decoration symbol serving as a big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit is derived and displayed.

  Also, in the present embodiment, although a big hit is not usually provided, after a finalized symbol is derived and displayed which is normally a big hit combination corresponding to a big hit when a big hit is provided, a period until the final round ends ( Alternatively, after the end of the final round, in a period until the next variable display game is started, a probability change promotion effect may be performed to notify that the big hit is a probability change big hit.

  In addition, the promotion effect (round number promotion effect, probability variation promotion direction effect) to be executed during the round is called the jackpot promotion operation (big hit medium round number promotion effect, big hit medium probability change promotion direction), and after the final round is over The promotion effect to be executed (round number promotion effect, definite variation promotion effect) may be referred to as ending promotion effect (ending round number promotion effect, ending probability change promotion effect).

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13 and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Besides, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate and the like are arranged on the back of the gaming board 2 etc. in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main substrate 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control substrate consisting of a setting function of random numbers used in the special view game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch disposed at a predetermined position, etc. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the first special figure or the second special figure The variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20, etc. It also has a function to control.

  The main circuit board 11 includes, for example, a microcomputer 100 for game control, a switch circuit 110 for capturing detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls, and transmitting the detection signals to the microcomputer 100 for game control, and the microcomputer 100 for game control A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp. Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the 9 and the movable part 17 or the like are mounted.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12 and is for outputting sound from the speaker 8 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12 and the like. The processing circuit etc. which perform audio signal processing are mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on the command and control data from the effect control board 12, the light on / off drive in the lamp 9 etc. The lamp driver circuit etc. to be carried are mounted. The accessory control substrate 16 is a control substrate for accessory operation control provided separately from the effect control substrate 12, and drives the movable accessory 17 based on a command from the effect control substrate 12, control data, etc. A circuit or the like that outputs a drive signal is mounted on an actuator (not shown).

  As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 is connected to a wire for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23. The gate switch 21, the first start opening switch 22A, the second start opening switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have any configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as one called a sensor. If it is In addition to the gate switch 21, the first start opening switch 22A, the second start opening switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the game machine 1 is similarly connected to the main board 11 (for example, a glass door (not shown)). A switch for detecting the open / close state of the game board 2), a switch for detecting the open / close state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting illegal vibration, and a switch for detecting illegal electromagnetic wave. In addition, the main substrate 11 has a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold indicator 25A, a second hold indicator 25B, and a common view hold indicator 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 is relayed by the relay substrate 15. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 via the relay substrate 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and another command form may be used. Further, in this example, the effect control command is configured by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the effect control command may be one or more than three. Good.

  In addition, the information which comprises each production control command may be memorize | stored in the command table in ROM101, for example. When transmitting a certain effect control command to the effect control board 12, as a setting for transmitting the effect control command, the storage address of the effect control command in the command table is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer It may be stored in the buffer area that has been Thereafter, the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed, etc., whereby the effect control command set as described above is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 Is transmitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, the command 8001H is a first change start command for specifying the start of change in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command for specifying the start of change in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in correspondence to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set in accordance with the content of an instruction by the effect control command. In the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the fluctuation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for notifying of a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. For example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the variable display result notification command determines whether the variable display result is “lost”, “16R positive variation big hit” or “8R positive variation big hit”, or a big hit type Different EXT data are set according to the determination result of.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination designating command for specifying a finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set in accordance with, for example, the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command 9F00 (H) is a waiting for customer demonstration specification command for specifying a waiting for customer demonstration.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of the effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the opening of the special winning opening for notifying that it is a period in which the special winning opening has changed from the opening state to the closing state in the big hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-decision result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-decision result and the jackpot type decision result and the EXT data to be set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the special winning opening open notification command and the special winning opening after open notification command, different EXT data, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed (for example, “1” to “16”) in the normal opening big hit state or short open end big hit state Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, and the first special winning is generated. It is a 1st starting opening winning a prize notification command which notifies that the 1st starting condition for performing the 1st special figure game by the symbol display device 4A was satisfied (1st starting opening winning specified command, 1st starting opening winning) Sometimes called a command).

  Command B 200 H is based on the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6 B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22 B, and the second starting winning is generated. It is a 2nd starting opening winning a prize notification command which notifies that the 2nd starting condition for performing the 2nd special figure game with special design indicatory device 4B is satisfied (2nd starting opening winning a specified command, 2nd starting opening winning Sometimes called time command).

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure storage number in order to display the first special figure storage number in an identifiable manner in the first start winning storage display area 5HL etc. . The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special view pending storage number in order to display the special view pending storage number in an identifiable manner in the second start winning storage display area 5HR or the like.

  For example, when the first start winning combination occurs (when the number of the first special view pending storage increases), the first pending opening number notification command is transmitted together with the first starting opening win notification command as the pending storage information. Further, when the second start winning combination occurs (when the number of the second special view pending storage increases), the second pending storage number notification command is transmitted together with the second starting opening win notification command as the pending storage information. If the first start winning combination occurs, the second pending storage number notification command may be sent in addition to the first starting opening winning combination notification command or the first pending storage number notification command, or the second start winning combination occurs. In this case, the first hold storage number notification command may be transmitted in addition to the second starting opening winning notification command and the second hold storage number notification command. In addition, the first start prize storage display area 5HL (or the second start prize storage display area 5HR) or the like is displayed when the first special figure reserve storage number (or the second special figure reserve storage number) increases. Send the first pending storage number addition specification command (or the second pending storage number addition specification command) to specify the addition of the special figure pending storage number (second special figure pending storage number), and the first special figure pending storage number ( Or, if the number of 2nd Tokushu Pending Storages decreases, the 1st Pending Storage Number Subtraction Designation Command (or 2nd Pending) that specifies subtraction of No. 1 Tokushu Pending Storage (or 2nd Tokushu Pending Storage) A storage number subtraction specification command may be transmitted.

  Note that, instead of or in addition to the first pending storage number notification command and the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command may be sent to notify the total pending storage number. Further, a total pending storage number addition designation command (total pending storage number subtraction designation command) may be sent which designates addition (or subtraction) of the total pending storage number.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (determination result specification command at the time of winning) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. The command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating the determination result of the big hit type as a determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” as the winning determination result. The command C6XXH is a variation category designation command (also referred to as a variation category command) indicating a determination result as to whether or not the variation category becomes a variation category corresponding to a specific pattern (described later) as a prize determination result. The variation category is also referred to as a variation pattern type, and is a name when the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is classified (aggregated) according to the type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including variation patterns of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

  In the present embodiment, in the winning random number value determination process (FIG. 16), when the start winning is generated, except for some cases (when there is the first starting winning in the high base state etc.), for variation category determination It is determined whether or not the variation category is a variation category corresponding to a specific pattern (described later), based on the random number value MR3. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 is super reachable in the variable display based on the start winning based on the value set in the variation category command transmitted from the main board 11 when the start winning occurs. It can be recognized whether or not.

  The effect control commands such as the fluctuation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command control the effect control CPU 120 to control one or more effect devices (the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable object 17, etc.) Used when Hereinafter, the effect control command used to control the display operation in the image display device 5 is also referred to as a display control command, and the effect control command used to control the audio output operation by the speaker 8 is also referred to as an audio control command. The effect control command used to control the light emitting operation is also referred to as a lamp control command, and the effect control command used to control the operation of the movable role 17 is also referred to as an item control command. Note that among the effect control commands, there may be a display control command, an audio control command, a lamp control command, and a feature control command, even if there are those related to a plurality of effect devices. Good.

  The command D0XX is a large winning opening winning notification command for notifying that there has been a game ball winning to the large winning opening (sometimes referred to as a large winning opening winning designation command). The special winning opening winning notification command is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12, for example, when the gaming ball passes the special winning opening.

  The command E0XX is a magnetic anomaly notification designation command for designating notification that a magnetic anomaly has occurred. For example, a magnet sensor (not shown, also referred to as a magnetic sensor) is provided on the back of a predetermined area of the game area 2, and the magnetic abnormality notification designation command detects an abnormality (a magnet sensor showing an abnormal value When a signal is input, it is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. In addition, a magnet sensor detects abnormality, for example, when there is an act of making a game ball illegally induce to a winning opening using a magnet. In addition, as a detection method of magnetic abnormality, a reference value may be always fixed and an abnormal value may be detected, or an abnormal value may be detected with a magnetic value at power-on as a reference value.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data and the like, and a game control work A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 for executing a control operation by executing a game control program, and updating of numerical data representing a random number independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to be performed and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores it, and various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103 Data reading operation to read out the data, reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, to the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105 Also, a transmission operation for outputting various signals is performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view exemplifying a random number value counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, a random value MR1 for determining the special display result, a random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, a random value MR3 for determining the variation category, Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 for display result determination and the random number value MR5 for variation pattern determination is controlled so as to be countable. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of such a game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating a part or all of the random numbers MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 updates the various numerical value data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of the MR 5 may be counted.

  Subsequently, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol will be described. Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “loss” is referred to as “loss fluctuation pattern”. In the lost fluctuation pattern, “non-reach fluctuation pattern (“ non-reach lost fluctuation pattern ”“ non-reach fluctuation pattern ”corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is“ non-reach ”in the case where the variable display result is“ loss ” (Also referred to as “variation pattern”) ”or“ reach variation pattern (“reach possibility variation pattern”) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “loss” Also included).

  Further, a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is referred to as a "hit variation pattern". The hit variation pattern includes a "big hit variation pattern" corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" and a "small hit variation pattern" corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit". It is also good. As the jackpot fluctuation patterns, a plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each of the jackpot types may be prepared.

  For non-reach variation patterns, prepare multiple variation patterns with different variation times, corresponding to the time reduction control that is executed when the total number of pending storages is large or when the gaming state is high probability state or time reduction state You should keep it. Thus, control of shortening the fluctuation time according to the total number of pending storages and the gaming state can be performed by selecting any variation pattern according to the total pending storage number and the gaming state.

  For fluctuation patterns including reach effects such as a jackpot fluctuation pattern and a reach fluctuation pattern, fluctuation patterns corresponding to reach modes of the respective reach effects are prepared. In addition, the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed is referred to as “normal reach fluctuation pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is executed is referred to as “super reach fluctuation pattern”.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory view for explaining an example of a variation category and a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, the fluctuation category “PA1” is a shortening / non-reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the fluctuation category “PA1”. The fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern "PA2-1" and "PA2-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PA2". The fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern "PA3-1" and "PA3-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PA3". The fluctuation category “PA4” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-3” belong to the variation category “PA4”. The fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-3” belong to the variation category “PA5”. The fluctuation category “PB1” is a shortening / reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern “PB1-1” belongs to the fluctuation category “PB1”. The variation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation pattern "PB3-1" and "PB3-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PB3". The fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-3” belong to the variation category “PB4”. The variation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) variation category. The variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-3” belong to the variation category “PB5”.

  The variation category "PA4" and the variation category "PA5" are collectively referred to as "super reach (loss) variation category", and the variation category "PB4" and the variation category "PB5" are collectively referred to as "super reach (big hit) The variation category "PA4", the variation category "PA5", the variation category "PB4" and the variation category "PB5" are collectively referred to as a "super reach variation category".

  Among the super reach variation categories, the variation category “PA5” and the variation category “PB5” are variation categories with a part movement including the movement of the movable character 17, and the variation category “PA4” and the variation category “PB4” , And the movement category without the movement of the bonus character that does not include the movement of the movable character 17. That is, the movable part 17 does not operate in the super reach α, but the movable part 17 operates in the super reach β.

  The variation pattern "PA2-1" belonging to the variation category "PA2" is a non-reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is performed once. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA2-2" is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA2-1" because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to the other variation patterns in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed.

  The variation pattern "PA3-1" belonging to the variation category "PA3" is a normal reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is performed once. The variation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the variation category “PA5” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-2” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern "PB3-1" belonging to the variation category "PB3" is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PB1-1” belonging to the variation category “PB1” is a shortening / reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shortened compared to the variation pattern “PB3-1”.

  In addition, although the fluctuation category “PB1” was described as a shortening and reaching (big hit) fluctuation category, shortening · becoming a big hit by stopping three symbols (for example, the same symbol) simultaneously without going through the reach It may be a non-reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation pattern “PB1-1” when the variation category “PB1” is a shortening / non-reach (big hit) variation category is a shortening / non-reach (big hit) variation pattern. In addition, "shortening / non-reach (big hit)" is also referred to as "hit", and "shortening / non-reach (big hit) fluctuation category" is also referred to as "butt fluctuation category", and "short / non-reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern" "Is also referred to as" hit variation pattern ". The variation category “PB1” may include a shortening / reach (big hit) variation pattern and a shortening / non-reach (big hit) variation pattern.

  The variation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the variation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice. The variation pattern “PB5-1” belonging to the variation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  In addition to the above, a fluctuation pattern in which a slip effect is executed, or a fluctuation in which a pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) (for example, an inclining effect similar to the pseudo continuous effect is executed but not temporarily stopped) is executed. You may prepare a pattern.

  Although the 2R probability variation big hit (probability) is not provided in this embodiment, a variation category for the 2R probability variation big hit (probability) may be provided when the 2R probability variation big impact (probability) is provided. For example, variation categories “PC1”, “PC2”, and “PC3” for 2R probability variation big hit (probability) may be provided. The fluctuation patterns “PC1-1” and “PC1-2” belong to the fluctuation category “PC1”. The variation pattern “PC1-1” is a non-reach (probable) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC1-2” is a non-reach (probable) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is performed once. In addition, you may prepare the non-reach (probability) fluctuation pattern in which a slip production is performed.

  The fluctuation patterns “PC2-1” to “PC2-3” belong to the fluctuation category “PC2”. The variation pattern “PC2-1” is a super reach α (probability) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-2” is a super reach α (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-3” is a super reach α (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice. In addition, a super reach α (probability) fluctuation pattern may be prepared, in which a gusset of pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed.

  The fluctuation patterns “PC3-1” to “PC3-3” belong to the fluctuation category “PC3”. The variation pattern “PC3-1” is a super reach β (probable) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-2” is a super reach β (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-3” is a super reach β (probability) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice. In addition, you may prepare the super reach (beta) (probability) change pattern in which the gusset of a pseudo | simulation continuous change (effect) is performed.

  The ROM 101 of the microcomputer 100 for game control shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used to control the progress of the game, in addition to the program for game control. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. The ROM 101 also includes data (for example, information for specifying the content of control commands) constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main substrate 11. The data etc. which comprise the table of 4 are stored.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. The display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 6 is a first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A (a special figure game using the first special figure) or a second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In the game (the special figure game using the second special figure), before the finalized special symbol to be the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variable display result is a big hit as "big hit (16R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit)" It is a table to be referred to in order to determine based on the random number value MR1 for special figure display result decision whether or not to control to game state.

  In the display result determination table 130, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special image display result according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “big hit (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit) It is assigned to the special figure display result of "" and "". Specifically, in the display result determination table 130, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special display display result determination in accordance with whether it is in the low probability state or the high probability state is It is assigned to the special map display result of "big hit" and "loss".

  In the display result determination table 130, when the gaming state is in the high certainty state, more determination values are allocated to the "big hit" special view display result than when the gaming state is the low certainty state. Specifically, in the low certainty state, a predetermined number (specifically, 190) of determination values (values in the range of "8000" to "8189") are assigned to the "big hit" special view display result. On the other hand, in the high certainty state, the judgment values "8000" to "8818" of more than the predetermined number (specifically, 819) are assigned to the "big hit" special map display results. In such a setting, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is considered as a "big hit" compared to when it is in the non probability change state (low probability state) The probability of being determined to control the gaming state is high.

  In the first special drawing display result determination table for the first special drawing, different display result determination tables are used for the first special drawing and the second special drawing. The judgment value is assigned, and in the second special drawing display result determination table for the second special drawing, the special drawing display result of the "small hit" of the judgment value of the predetermined range smaller than the first special drawing display result determination table May be assigned to This makes it possible to avoid frequent occurrences of "small hits" in the gaming state in which the gaming ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning prize ball device 6B.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the big hit type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type to any one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, when it is determined to control the special figure display result to the jackpot gaming state Is a table to be referenced. In the big hit classification determination table 131, the first special figure game (special figure game using the first special figure) by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed or the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B The numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type according to whether (the special figure game using the second special figure) is executed is the respective big hit type (16 R probability variation big hit, 8 R probability variation Assigned to the jackpot).

  In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table 131, in the case of the first special figure game, that is, when the special figure to be varied (also referred to as a variation special figure) is the first special figure, a predetermined number (specifically, The 50 judgment values (values in the range of “0” to “49”) are assigned to the 16R probability variation big hit. On the other hand, in the case of the second special figure game, that is, when the variation special figure is the second special figure, the number (more specifically, 80) of the judgment values (“0” to “0”) are larger than the predetermined number. Values in the range of 79 ") are assigned to the 16R probability variation big hit. With such a setting, the second special view game is more likely to be a big hit by 16R than the first special view, so the game state is easy for the game ball to easily enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. In the high certainty base state (specifically, 70 revolutions after the big hit end), it is possible to increase the sense of expectation of becoming a 16 R probability variation big hit.

  In the present embodiment, 2R probability variation big hit (probability) is not provided, but when 2R probability variation big hit (probability) is provided, if it is the second special figure game, it is more than the first special figure game. A small number of judgment values may be assigned to 2R probability variation big hits (probability). With such a setting, the second special figure game is less likely to be a 2R probability variation hit (probability) than the first special figure, so the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. In the gaming state, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the 2R probability variation big hit (studging) which is difficult to obtain the winning balls, and to prevent the decrease in the game interest due to the extension of the game.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation category determination table which is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of variation categories. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables that are different from each other in the types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table and the respective determination ratios. In the variation category determination table, each of the variation categories is assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determination of the variation category. Note that one large change category determination table including information of all the change category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101 instead of the plurality of change category determination tables.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table to be referred to in order to determine one of the plurality of variation patterns. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables that are different from each other in the types of fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the fluctuation pattern determination table and the determination ratio of each. In the fluctuation pattern determination table, numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns. Note that, instead of the plurality of variation pattern determination tables, one large variation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101 including information of each variation pattern determination table.

  In addition, the ROM 101 stores a prefetch determination table which is referred to in order to determine whether or not the variation category becomes a specific pattern (described later). Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of pre-reading determination tables having different determination contents and determination rates. In the preread determination table, numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category are assigned to the respective determination contents. Note that, instead of the plurality of prefetch determination tables, one large prefetch determination table including information of all the prefetch determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power source, a part or all of which is created on a predetermined power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the content of a part or all of the RAM 102 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply discharges and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). Ru. In particular, data indicating at least the gaming state, that is, data corresponding to the control state of the gaming control means and data indicating the number of unpaid award balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data required to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after the power failure or the like occurs (eg Process flag etc. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. There is. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 is a first special view reserve storage unit 151A, a second special view reserve storage unit 151B, a common view reserve storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is a special figure game (although the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 6A and the first start winning occurs but has not yet started The reserve data (first special view reserve information) of the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special view reserve storage unit 151A is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the order of detection of the gaming balls) to the first start winning opening, and the CPU 103 randomizes the random numbers based on the passage The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as reserve data (first special view reserve information) until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  The second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is a special figure game that is not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning occurs. The hold data (second special view hold information) of (the second special view game played by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special view reserve storage unit 151B is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the order of detection of the game balls) to the second start winning opening, random number by the CPU 103 based on the passage (enter) of the game balls The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as reserve data (second special view reserve information) until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  In addition, the hold data of the first special view game by the first special symbol display device 4A (the first special view hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition) and the second special view game of the second special symbol display device 4B The holding data (second special-image holding information based on establishment of the second start winning) may be stored in the common holding storage unit in association with the holding number.

  The common drawing reserve storage unit 151C is a reserved data related to the common drawing game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the gaming ball that has passed the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 Store information). For example, the common drawing reserve storage unit 151C determines the common drawing display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the gaming ball in correspondence with the holding number in the order that the gaming ball passed the passing gate 41 The numerical value data indicating the random number value MR4 for the memory is stored as reserved data (general drawing reserve information) until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags capable of updating the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state. As a specific example, the game control flag setting unit 152 indicates the data indicating the flag value, the on state or the off state for each of the special drawing process flag, the high probability flag, the high base flag, the big hit flag, etc. Data is stored. The high certainty flag is a flag indicating whether the state is the high certainty state or the low certainty state. The high base flag is a flag indicating whether the state is a high base state or a low base state. The big hit flag is a flag indicating that it is a big hit gaming state.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the game control counter setting unit 154, the first hold storage number count value, which is the storage value of the first hold storage number counter for counting the first special view hold storage number, and the second special view hold storage number The second pending storage number count value which is the storage value of the second pending storage number counter for counting, the total pending storage number count value which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number, etc. It is memorized. In addition, the game control counter setting unit 154 also stores the stored value (the variable count value) and the like of the fluctuation counter (described later).

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 includes an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with a CPU for effect control 120 which performs control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 for storing a program for effect control, fixed data and the like, and a work area for the CPU 120 for effect control. RAM 122, the display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, etc., and the random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124, an I / O 125, and an RTC (real time clock) circuit 126 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable object, etc.) are executed by executing the effect control program read out from the ROM 121 A process for controlling the rendering operation by 17) is executed. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the effect control CPU 120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 121, a change data write operation in which the effect control CPU 120 writes various change data in the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 in the RAM 122 Fluctuation data read operation to read out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, reception operation to receive various signal input from outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, the effect control CPU 120 to I / O for effect control CPU 120 A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The RTC circuit 126 is a clocking means capable of clocking the current date and time, such as hour, minute, and second. The RTC circuit 126 has a function of automatically adjusting the clock value to Japanese standard time periodically using a radio-controlled clock. When the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC circuit 126 operates by receiving the supply of power from a backup power supply circuit (not shown). Timekeeping information from the RTC circuit 126 is supplied to the effect control CPU 120 and the like.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  A wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image to the image display device 5 and an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating an instruction to the sound control substrate 13 are transmitted to the effect control substrate 12. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14, and the like are connected. Furthermore, in the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation on the stick controller 31A has been detected, or the game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that a user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

  In the effect control board 12, for example, numerical data indicating various random number values used to control the effect operation is counted by the random number circuit 124 or the like in an updatable manner. The random number used to control such a rendering operation is also referred to as a rendering random number.

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used to control the rendering operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 120 for effect control to make various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  For example, in the ROM 121, a holding etc. effect execution presence / absence determination table referred to determine whether to execute holding etc. effects, a holding etc. effect pattern when it is determined to execute holding etc. (for example, addition A hold etc. effect pattern determination table may be stored which is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the active display from time to time of the digestion.

  Further, the ROM 121 has a plurality of effect control patterns used to control the effect operation by the effect control CPU 120 using various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable object 17, etc.) Data to be configured is stored. Each effect control pattern is composed of data indicating control contents of various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. That is, various rendering operations are realized by setting a rendering control pattern. For example, the variable display operation of the decorative symbol corresponding to each fluctuation pattern is realized by setting the effect control pattern corresponding to each fluctuation pattern. The hold control, the active display effect, the fanfare effect, the effect during the round game (the effect during opening and the effect during closing), the ending effect and the like are also realized by setting the effect control pattern corresponding to each effect.

  FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is, for example, control for controlling various effect operations such as effect control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, movable combination control data, end code, etc. It may be configured from data, and the contents of various effect control, switching timing of effect control, and the like may be set in time series. In addition to the above, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for specifying the content of operation control in a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value (effect control process timer value) of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM built in the effect control microcomputer. That is, determination values corresponding to the execution time (rendering time) of each rendering operation are set in advance. Note that, instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command has been received from the main substrate 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling an effect operation in the effect control microcomputer. Data indicating the switching timing or the like of effect control may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes, for example, data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data for specifying the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes, for example, data indicating a voice output mode from the speaker 8, such as data indicating an output mode such as a rendering sound interlocked with a variable display operation of the decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the voice control data is data designating a voice output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating a light emission operation mode of the lamp 9. That is, the lamp control data is data for specifying the light emitting operation of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, a period in which an operation on an operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, and data indicating control content of a rendering operation in the case where the operation is effectively detected. That is, the operation detection control data is data for specifying a rendering operation according to the operation on the operation unit. The movable part control data includes, for example, data indicating an operation mode of the movable part 17. That is, the movable part control data is data for specifying the operation of the movable part 17. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all of the effect control patterns, but are effect control patterns configured to include a part of control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram for describing various effect operations performed in accordance with the content of the effect control pattern. The effect control CPU 120 determines control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination values, and the character Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 5. Further, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 8 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 9 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, and an operation specified by the operation detection control data In the effective period, control for accepting the operation on the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B and determining the contents of the effect is performed. In addition, dummy data (data for which control is not specified) may be set as data corresponding to a rendering device that is not to be controlled even though it corresponds to the rendering control process timer determination value.

  Although the rendering operation shown in FIG. 9 (B) corresponds to the entire period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the final stop, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative symbol An effect control pattern may be provided to execute the effect operation in response to a partial period (e.g., a period in which the advance effect is performed). Alternatively, to perform the rendering operation in accordance with a predetermined period other than during variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the big hit gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state, etc.) An effect control pattern of may be provided.

  When setting the effect control pattern, pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read out from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or pattern data of the corresponding effect control pattern The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not any of the effect control process timer determination values match, and if it matches, the effect operation according to the corresponding various control data Control the As described above, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect device (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. 9, advance the control of the movable part 17 and the like). In each of the process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to #n, voice control data # 1 to voice control Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n, movable combination control data # 1 to movable combination control data #n are respectively effects The control content of the rendering operation in the device is shown, and rendering control execution data # 1 to rendering control execution data #n for specifying the execution of rendering control are configured.

  The instruction according to the effect control pattern set in this manner is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, the feature control board 16, and the like. For example, in the display control unit 123 that has received an instruction from the effect control CPU 120, a predetermined VDP, for example, reads out the image data indicated by the instruction from the image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily stores it in the VRAM. Let Further, in the voice control board 13 receiving the command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and expands it by temporarily storing it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used to control the effect operation, for example, a data holding area 190 for effect control as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. There is.

  For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 or the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state. As a specific example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the effect process flag, the high probability flag, the high base flag, etc. Ru.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. In addition, the effect control counter setting unit 193 also stores data indicating the effect number count value which is a storage value of the effect number counter for counting one or both of the number of time reduction and the number of probability variation.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. In the first start winning reception command buffer 194A, storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of pending storages are provided. . When there is a start winning to the first start winning opening, a predetermined command is transmitted from main substrate 11 to effect control substrate 12. Specifically, one set of four commands (a first start opening winning notice command, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, a first pending storage number notifying command) or two commands (first start opening winning notice) The command and the first notification of the number of pending storages are sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 in one set. Among these commands sent from the main board 11, the first start winning reception command buffer 194A can store a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a first pending storage number notification command, for each buffer number. A storage area for storing the symbol designation command, a storage area for storing the variation category command, and a storage area for storing the first pending storage number notification command are secured.

  The effect control CPU 120 associates the command received from the main board 11 at the time of the first start winning combination with each set, and stores it in the storage area of the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 normally receives four commands (a first start opening prize notification command, a symbol designation command, a change category command, and a first pending storage number notification command) at the time of the first start winning, free area Nothing is stored in any of the buffer number storage areas (storage areas for storing design designation commands, storage areas for storing variation category commands, and storage areas for storing the first pending storage count notification command) A symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a first pending storage number notification command are stored in the respective storage areas of the buffer numbers. When the storage area of a plurality of buffer numbers is an empty area, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the first pending storage number notification command are stored in the storage area of the smallest buffer number which is an empty area. The example shown in FIG. 10B represents a state in which the command is stored in the storage area of buffer numbers “1” to “3”. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 normally receives two commands (the first start opening winning notice command and the first hold storage number notification command) at the time of the first start winning, storage of the buffer number which is an empty area An area (a storage area for storing a symbol designation command (a storage area shown as "design designation" in FIG. 10B), a storage area for a fluctuation category command ("variation category" shown in FIG. 10B) Storage area) and a storage area for storing the first pending storage number notification command (a storage area shown as "pending storage number notification" in FIG. 10B) (Storage area) stores the first pending storage number notification command. When the storage area of a plurality of buffer numbers is an empty area, the first pending storage count notification command is stored in the storage area of the smallest buffer number which is an empty area.

  The commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B are deleted one by one each time variable display of a decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the first special view game, Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (the winning order of the commands). Specifically, when variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special view game, one command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number is deleted and deleted. The commands stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the command are shifted while maintaining the winning order (the size relation of the buffer numbers). For example, when variable display of a decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the first special view game in the storage state shown in FIG. 10B, the command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "1" is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number “2” is shifted to buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number “3” becomes buffer number “2”. Be shifted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 10C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second start winning reception command buffer 194B is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of pending storages. . When there is a start winning to the second start winning opening, a predetermined command is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. Specifically, four commands (a second start opening winning notice command, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, a second pending storage number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 in one set. Ru. Among the commands sent from the main board 11, the second start winning reception command buffer 194B can store a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a second pending storage number notification command, for each buffer number. A storage area for storing a symbol designation command, a storage area for storing a variation category command, and a storage area for storing a second pending storage number notification command are secured.

  The effect control CPU 120 associates the command received from the main board 11 at the time of the second start winning with each set, and stores it in the storage area of the second start winning received command buffer 194B. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 normally receives four commands (a second start opening prize notification command, a symbol designation command, a change category command, a second pending storage number notification command) at the time of the second start winning, the vacant area A storage area for buffer numbers (a storage area for storing a symbol designation command (a storage area shown as "design designation" in FIG. 10C), a storage area for storing a variation category command (FIG. 10C) In the storage area shown as "variable category", and in the storage area for storing the second pending storage number notification command (the storage area shown as "pending storage number notification" in FIG. 10 (C)) nothing is stored The design instruction command, the variation category command, and the second pending storage number notification command are stored in the respective storage areas of the buffer numbers which are not stored. When the storage area of a plurality of buffer numbers is an empty area, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the second pending storage number notification command are stored in the storage area of the smallest buffer number which is an empty area. The example shown in FIG. 10C shows a state in which the command is stored in the storage area of buffer numbers “1” to “2”.

  The commands stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 10C are deleted one by one each time variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the second special view game, Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (the winning order of the commands). Specifically, when variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, one command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number is deleted and deleted. The commands stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the command are shifted while maintaining the winning order (the size relation of the buffer numbers). For example, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special figure game in the storage state shown in FIG. 10C, the command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "1" is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to buffer number "1".

  Further, in the present embodiment, data constituting the first preread notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 10D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. Storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to respective data constituting the first start winning combination reception command buffer 194A are provided in the first read advance notice buffer 194C. That is, in the first read advance notice buffer 194C, the contents of the determination regarding the read advance notice effect related to the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Be done. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B, for example, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the first read advance notice buffer 194C, the content associated with the buffer number is also deleted. In addition, in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B, the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is another buffer due to the start of variable display of the decorative symbol etc. When shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number are also shifted to the other buffer numbers in the first read advance notice buffer 194C.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data constituting the second preread notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 10E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. Storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to respective data constituting the second start winning combination reception command buffer 194B are provided in the second preread notice buffer 194D. That is, in the second preread notice buffer 194D, the contents of the determination regarding the preread notice effect relating to each hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 etc. are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Be done. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 10C, for example, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the second read advance notice buffer 194D, the content associated with the buffer number is also deleted. In addition, in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 10C, the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is another buffer due to the start of variable display of the decorative symbol etc. When shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number are also shifted to the other buffer numbers in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described.

  In the main substrate 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing to be gaming control main processing. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt prohibition and then performs necessary initialization. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Further, the register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When initialization is complete, after enabling the interrupt, it enters loop processing. In the game control main process, the loop process may be entered after executing the process for restoring the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, whereby the gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, and the second starting opening via the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by performing predetermined main side error processing (including sensor error notification processing), abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S12). Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, data such as big hit information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step S13).

  Following the information output process of step S13, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process (step S14). In the gaming random number updating process of step S14, for example, at least a part of gaming random numbers (for example, random number values MR1 to MR5 etc.) used on the main substrate 11 side is updated by software. As one example, the CPU 103 may update numerical data indicating the gaming random number counted by the random counter of the gaming control counter setting unit 154 by software.

  Subsequent to the game random number updating process of step S14, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S15). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special drawing process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B, opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 7 and the like in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process processing, the CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing (step S16). The normal symbol process processing is executed to control the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of the segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 20, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B. Enables tilting operation setting and so on.

  Subsequent to the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, effect control After control data is set in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the substrate 12, predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By setting the switch to the off state, transmission of effect control commands based on settings in the command transmission table is enabled. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is ended after setting to the interrupt enabled state.

  FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing an example of the sensor error notification process (step S12) executed in the game control timer interrupt process. In the sensor error notification process shown in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a magnet sensor signal indicating an abnormal value has been input from the magnet sensor (step S20). When the magnet sensor signal is not input in step S20 (step S20; NO), the sensor error notification process is ended.

  When the magnet sensor signal is input in step S20 (step S20; YES), the CPU 103 determines that the magnetic abnormality has occurred, and sets a magnetic abnormality flag indicating that the magnetic abnormality has been detected (step S21). The error notification LED is turned on to notify that the magnetic abnormality has occurred (step S22), and setting for transmitting the magnetic abnormality notification designation command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S23). Then, the sensor error notification process is ended. Note that the command for magnetic error notification designation command set in step S23 is performed by executing the command control process (step S17) of the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. , From the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12.

  FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process process executed in step S15 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the special symbol process processing, the CPU 103 first executes start winning determination processing (step S101). FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process (step S15) shown in FIG.

  In the start winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 first detects the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. Based on the determination, it is determined whether the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201). When it is determined in step S201 that the first starting opening switch 22A is on (step S201; YES), the CPU 103 determines that the first special view reservation storage number (the first special view game suspension number) is predetermined. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) has been reached (step S202). The CPU 103 may identify the first special image storage number by reading the first storage number count value, which is the storage value of the first storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example.

  If it is determined in step S202 that the number of first special view reservations is not the upper limit (step S202; NO), the CPU 103 stores the value stored in the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (starting “1” is set to the mouth buffer value) (step S207). Subsequent to the process of step S207, the CPU 103 executes a start winning process (FIG. 15) (step S208), and sets (clears) "0" to the start hole buffer value (step S209).

  If it is determined in step S201 that the first start port switch 22A is not on (step S201 (NO)), or if it is determined in step S202 that the number of first special view storages has reached the upper limit (Step S202 (YES)) After executing the processing of step S209, the CPU 103 receives a command from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. Based on the detection signal, it is determined whether the second start port switch 22B is on (step S203). When it is determined in step S203 that the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step S203; YES), the CPU 103 determines that the second special view reserve storage number (the number of reserve for the second special view game) is predetermined. It is determined whether the upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) has been reached (step S204). The CPU 103 may specify the second special-image storage number by reading the second-storage number count, which is a storage value of the second-storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example.

  If it is determined in step S204 that the second special drawing reserve storage number is not the upper limit value (step S204; NO), the CPU 103 stores the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (starting value "2" is set to the mouth buffer value) (step S210). Subsequent to the process of step S210, the CPU 103 executes the start winning process (FIG. 15) (step S211), sets (clears) "0" to the start hole buffer value (step S212), and determines the start winning determination process. Finish.

  When it is determined in step S203 that the second start port switch 22B is not on (step S203 (NO)), or when it is determined in step S204 that the number of second special view storages has reached the upper limit value. (Step S204 (YES)), the start winning determination processing ends without performing the processing of steps S210, S211, and S212.

  According to the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 14, even if the first start hole switch 22A and the second start hole switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of the game ball, the process based on the respective detections Can be completed.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning process (steps S208 and S211). In the start winning process shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103 first updates the number of to-be-saved special drawing storages according to the starting opening buffer value so as to add 1 (step S215). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the first pending storage number count value is incremented by one, while when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the second pending storage number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by one when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by one when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. Following the process of step S215, the total number of pending storages is updated so as to add one (step S216). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated so as to add one.

  Subsequent to the process of step S216, the CPU 103 selects a special figure display result determination random number value MR1 from among the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 and the game control counter setting unit 154 for determining the big hit type. The numerical value data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category is extracted (step S217). Numeric data representing each random number value extracted in this manner is stored at the top of the empty entry in the special-image hold storage unit 151 according to the starting opening buffer value by being set as hold information (step S218). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, numerical data representing random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the first special image storage unit 151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, Numerical data representing random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in second special image storage unit 151B.

  Subsequent to the process of step S218, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a starting opening winning notice command according to the starting opening buffer value to the effect control board 12 (step S219). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning notification command is performed. When the starting opening buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the second starting opening winning notification command is performed. For example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, the command command processing (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The signal is transmitted from the substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12.

  Subsequent to the process of step S219, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number value determination process (step S220). Thereafter, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command (step S221). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the setting for transmitting the first pending storage number notification command is performed. When the starting opening buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the second holding storage number notification command is performed. Then, the start winning process ends. In addition, for example, the command control process (step S17) of the timer control process for game control shown in FIG. , From the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the winning random number value determination process (step S220). In the prize random number value determination process shown in FIG. 16, the CPU 103 first specifies the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S401). In the process of step S401, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big hit gaming state is by checking the state of the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like. Specifically, the CPU 103 identifies the jackpot gaming state when the jackpot flag is on, and identifies the jackpot gaming state when the jackpot flag is not on (when it is off). Further, in the process of step S401, the CPU 103 identifies the high base state or the low base state by confirming the state of the high base flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like. Specifically, the CPU 103 identifies the high base state when the high base flag is in the on state, and identifies the low base state when the high base flag is not in the on state (when in the off state). . Further, in the process of step S401, even if the CPU 103 determines the state of high probability or low probability by confirming the state of the high probability flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, etc. Good. Specifically, the CPU 103 identifies the high probability state when the high probability flag is in the on state, and identifies the low probability state when the high probability flag is not in the on state (when it is in the off state). May be

  Following the process of step S401, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot gaming state is currently in progress (step S402). In other words, it is determined whether or not it has been determined in the process of step S401 that the jackpot gaming state has been made. If it is determined in step S402 that the player is not in the big hit gaming state (step S402; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether it is in the high base state (step S403). That is, it is determined whether or not it has been determined in the process of step S401 that the high base state is established.

  If it is determined in step S402 that a big hit game state is determined (step S402; YES), or if it is determined in step S403 that a high base state is found (step S403; YES), the CPU 103 determines the starting opening buffer value. It is determined whether or not "2" (step S404). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the second start winning combination (the start winning combination where the variation special figure is the second special figure). When it is determined in step S404 that the starting opening buffer value is not "2" (step S404; NO), the winning random number value determination process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S403 that the high base state is not set (step S403 (NO)) or if it is determined in step S404 that the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step S404 (YES)) The CPU 103 sets (selects) a special view display result determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (step S405). Specifically, when the CPU 103 is not in the high certainty state, according to the display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 6, the table data for the low certainty state (the value of the range of “8000” to “8189” is “big hit” The table data allocated to the special view display result is set, and when it is in the high probability state, the table data for the high probability state (“8000” to “8818” is displayed from the display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. The table data assigned to the special map display result of the value of the range is “big hit” is set In addition, when the high probability flag is in the on state, the CPU 103 identifies the high probability state and the high probability flag If it is not in the ON state (in the OFF state), it may be specified as the low certainty state, and the display result determination table which is different between the first special figure and the second special figure When using the first special view display result determination table and the second special view display result determination table), if the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the first special view display result determination table is used, and the starting opening is used. If the buffer value is “2”, the second special-image display result determination table may be used.

  Subsequent to the process of step S405, the CPU 103 determines that the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special view display result extracted in step S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. It is determined whether there is any (step S406). For example, the CPU 103 compares, one by one, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 with the individual determination values assigned to the "big hit" special figure display result in the special figure display result determination table data set in step S405. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a determination value that matches the numerical data indicating the random value MR1. Alternatively, CPU 103 sets numerical value data indicating random number value MR1 and the minimum value (lower limit value) of the determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table data set in step S405. And the maximum value (upper limit value) may be compared to determine whether the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within the range of the minimum value and the maximum value of the determination value.

  When it is determined in step S406 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S406; YES), it indicates the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination extracted in step S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. Based on the numerical data, the jackpot type is determined (step S407). Specifically, first, CPU 103 responds to a fluctuation special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified by the start opening buffer value. Set (select) the big hit classification decision table. Specifically, the CPU 103 sets table data corresponding to the fluctuation special figure from the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 7. Subsequently, for example, the CPU 103 compares the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type with the determination value of each big hit type in the big hit type determination table data set according to the variation special figure etc. It is sufficient to determine the type of jackpot that matches the numerical data indicating the random value MR2.

  Subsequent to the process of step S407, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a symbol designation command according to the determination result of the process of step S407 to the effect control board 12 (step S408). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S406 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S406; NO), setting for transmitting the symbol designation command according to the loss to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S409). In addition, the symbol designation command set in step S409 is, for example, mainly executed by executing the command control process (step S17) of the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is finished. The signal is transmitted from the substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12.

After executing the process of step S408 or the process of step S409, the CPU 103 determines whether the high base state is set (step S410). The process of step S410 is executed in the following four scenes (scene 1 to scene 4).
(Scene 1)
A scene that is not a big hit gaming state and is a low base state (when step S402 (NO), step S403 (NO)). In addition, even if it is the first start winning (starting winning where the variation special figure is the first special drawing), there may be the second starting winning (start winning where the variation special figure is the second special drawing).
(Scene 2)
A scene where there is a second starting winning combination not in the jackpot gaming state but in the high base state (step S402 (NO), step S403 (YES), step S404 (YES)).
(Scene 3)
When it is a big hit gaming state and there is a second starting winning combination in the low base state (step S402 (YES), when it becomes step S404 (YES)).
(Scene 4)
When it is a big hit gaming state and there is a second starting winning combination in the high base state (step S402 (YES), when it becomes step S404 (YES)).

  If it is determined in step S410 that the high base state is not set (step S410; NO), that is, if the scene 1 or the scene 3 described above, the CPU 103 is for the low base state according to the special view display result. The preread determination table is set (selected) (step S411). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S410 that the high base state is present (step S410; YES), that is, if the scene 2 or the scene 4 is present, the CPU 103 selects the high base state according to the special view display result. Set (select) a preread determination table for the user (step S412).

  FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the prefetch determination table. FIG. 17A is a configuration example of the prefetching determination table to be referred to when the special map display result is “lost” in the low base state. FIG. 17B is a configuration example of the prefetching determination table to be referred to when the special map display result is “lost” in the high base state. FIG. 17C is a configuration example of the prefetching determination table to be referred to when the special view display result is set to the “big hit” in the low base state or the high base state. FIG. 17D is a setting example of the variation category command. The “specific pattern” is a variation pattern that becomes a super reach variation pattern regardless of the number of reserved memories. The "non-specific pattern" is a variation pattern other than the "specific pattern".

  The prefetch determination table of FIG. 17A is set based on the setting of the variation category determination table to be referred to when the special view display result is “lost” in the low base state shown in FIG. 20A. There is. According to the variation category determination table of FIG. 20 (A), if the random number value MR3 for variation category determination is any one of “97” to “99”, the super reach variation category (variation It is determined to the category "PA4", "PA5"). That is, if the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category is any of "97" to "99", the super reach variation pattern (variation pattern "PA4-1" to "PA4-3" regardless of the number of reserved memories. , Fluctuation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-3”) (see FIG. 21). Therefore, when the special figure display result is "losing" in the low base state, at least when the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category is any of "97" to "99", the start winning game or variable display start Regardless of the number of reserved memories at the time (the time of the change), it is determined to a specific change pattern (specific pattern) called a super reach change pattern. Therefore, in the prefetch determination table of FIG. 17A, values in the range of "97" to "99" are assigned to "specific pattern", and "0" to "non-specific pattern" other than "specific pattern". Values in the range of "96" are assigned.

  The prefetch determination table of FIG. 17B is set based on the setting of the variation category determination table to be referred to when the special view display result is “lost” in the high base state shown in FIG. 20B. There is. According to the variation category determination table of FIG. 20 (B), if the random number value MR3 for variation category determination is any one of “89” to “99”, the super reach variation category (variation) It is determined to the category "PA4", "PA5"). That is, if the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category is any one of "89" to "99", the super reach variation pattern (variation pattern "PA4-1" to "PA4-3" regardless of the number of reserved memories. , Fluctuation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-3”) (see FIG. 21). Therefore, when the special figure display result is "losing" in the high base state, at least when the random number value MR3 for variable category determination is any of "89" to "99", the start winning game or variable display start The specific pattern is determined regardless of the number of pending storages at the time (the time of the change). Therefore, in the prefetch determination table of FIG. 17B, values in the range of “89” to “99” are assigned to “specific pattern”, and “0” to “non-specific pattern” other than “specific pattern”. Values in the range of "88" are assigned.

  The prefetch determination table of FIG. 17C is a variation category determination table to be referred to when the special view display result is “big hit” in the low base state shown in FIG. 20C, and FIG. In the high base state shown, the special category display result is set based on the variation category determination table to be referred to when making the "big hit". According to the variation category determination table of FIG. 20C and the variation category determination table of FIG. 20D, if the random value MR3 for variation category determination is any of “60” to “99”, The super reach variation category (variation category “PB4”, “PB5”) is determined regardless of the number of pending storages. That is, if the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category is any of "60" to "99", the super reach variation patterns (variation patterns "PB4-1" to "PB4-3" regardless of the number of reserved memories. , Fluctuation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-3”) (see FIG. 21). Therefore, when the special figure display result is "big hit" in the low base state or high base state, at least when the random number value MR3 for variable category determination is any of "60" to "99", at the start winning combination Alternatively, the specific pattern is determined regardless of the number of pending storages at the start of variable display (at the time of the change). Therefore, in the prefetch determination table of FIG. 17C, values in the range of “60” to “99” are assigned to “specific pattern”, and “0” to “non-specific pattern” other than “specific pattern”. Values in the range of "59" are assigned.

  Therefore, in the process of step S411 executed when it is determined that the high base state is not set in step S410, the CPU 103 determines that the special view display result is "lost" in step S406. The table data constituting the prefetch determination table shown in (A) is set, and if it is determined in step S406 that the special map display result is "big hit", the prefetching shown in FIG. 17C. Set the table data that composes the judgment table.

  Further, in the process of step S412 executed when it is determined in step S410 that the high base state is established, the CPU 103 determines that the special view display result is "lost" in step S406, as shown in FIG. The table data constituting the preread determination table shown in (B) is set, and in the case where it is determined in step S406 that the special map display result is "big hit", the preread shown in FIG. Set the table data that composes the judgment table.

  After executing the process of step S411 or the process of step S412, the CPU 103 determines whether the variation pattern is "non-specific pattern" or "specific pattern" based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variable category. It is determined whether or not there is any (step S413). Specifically, the CPU 103 reads numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variable category determination extracted in step S217 of the start winning processing shown in FIG. 15 and the preread set in step S411 or step S412. By comparing the determination value of the “non-specific pattern” or the “specific pattern” in the table data for determination, any one of the determination value of the “non-specific pattern” or the determination value of the “specific pattern” has the random number MR3 It may be determined whether it matches the numerical data shown.

  After the process of step S413, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the variation category command according to the determination result (prefetching determination) in step S413 (step S414), and ends the winning random number value determination process. In the process of step S414, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting for transmitting any of the fluctuation category commands shown in FIG. 17D according to the determination result in the process of step S413. Specifically, when it is determined in the process of step S413 that the pattern is a non-specific pattern (loss), transmission setting for transmitting a variation category command in which "00" is set to the EXT data to the effect control board 12 When it is determined that the pattern is a specific pattern (loss), transmission setting is performed to transmit a variation category command in which “01” is set to the EXT data to the effect control board 12, and a non-specific pattern (big hit) When it is determined that there is a variation category command in which "02" is set in the EXT data, transmission setting is performed to send to the effect control board 12, and when it is determined that it is a specific pattern (big hit), the EXT data "03 The transmission setting for transmitting the variation category command in which “is set” to the effect control board 12 is performed.

  Subsequent to the start winning determination process (step S101), the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. .

  The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is processing to be executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0". The special symbol normal processing includes processing of determining (predetermining) whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be “big hit” before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result is determined in advance, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "1".

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is a process that is executed when the value of the special process process flag is "1". The variation pattern setting process is a process of determining a variation pattern based on a variable display result or the like previously determined in the special symbol normal process (step S110), a variation pattern specification command, a variable display result notification command, and a first variation start command It includes a setting process and the like for transmitting (or the second change start command). In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "2".

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is a process that is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". The special symbol variation process is a process of causing the special symbol to be varied (variable display) in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the start of variation is a special figure variation time (FIG. 5) It includes the process of determining whether or not it has reached. In the special symbol variation processing, when the elapsed time after the start of variation reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stopping process of step S113 is a process executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". Special symbol stop processing is to stop the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the process to stop (deriving) the finalized special symbol, and the big hit flag is turned off If it is (if it is determined in advance that the variable display result in the special symbol normal processing (step S110) is "miss" in advance) as a process to be executed to change the gaming state transition of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Setting processing for transmitting a hit start designation command (fanfare command) as processing to be executed when processing or when the big hit flag is in the on state (when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” in advance) And so on. In the special symbol stop process, when the big hit flag is off, the value of the special process process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and when the big hit flag is on, the special process process flag Update the value of to "4".

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is processing to be executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing is a process that performs setting for opening the big winning opening (for example, setting of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door for opening the big winning opening) , And a setting process for transmitting a special winning opening open notification command and the like. In the big hit opening pre-processing, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit open process in step S115 is a process that is executed when the value of the special process process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is large based on whether the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening has passed a predetermined time or whether the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23 has reached a predetermined number, etc. A process of determining the timing of returning the winning opening from the open state to the closing state, and setting for closing the big winning opening (for example, for the solenoid 82 for the winning opening door for closing the big winning opening It includes a process of setting a solenoid drive signal and the like, a setting process of transmitting a notification command and the like after opening the special winning opening, and the like. In the big hit open processing, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "6".

  The big hit opening post process in step S116 is a process that is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “6”. The big hit opening post-processing is processing to determine whether or not the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening opened has reached the maximum winning opening opening number of times, or when the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value has not been reached The process to be executed includes a setting process for transmitting a special winning opening open notification command, and a setting process for transmitting a hit ending designation command as a process to be executed when the special winning opening opening frequency reaches the maximum value. It is. In the big hit opening post processing, when the number of rounds execution has not reached the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and when reaching the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value Update the value of the special drawing process flag to "7".

  The big hit end processing of step S117 is processing that is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "7". The big hit end process is a process of determining whether or not the big hit end production waiting time (waiting time corresponding to the execution period of the ending production) has elapsed, or a process to be executed when the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed This includes processing for setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the high probability high base state, processing for setting the number of times of ST, and the number of times of time saving. In the big hit end process, when the waiting time corresponding to the execution period of ending effect has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value.

  The big hit open process (step S115), the big hit open post process (step S116), the big hit open pre-process (step S114), the big hit end process (step S117) is a big win when the count switch 23 is turned on. The transmission setting for transmitting the mouth winning notice command is included.

  FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol normal processing (step S110). In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first determines whether the number of second special view reservations is "0" (step S231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special view game is on hold. For example, in the process of step S231, the second hold storage count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether the read value is "0".

  If it is determined in step S231 that the second special drawing reserve storage count is not “0” (step S231; NO), the CPU 103 selects a special drawing from the reserve number “1” of the second special view reserve storage unit 151B. The reserved data (numerical data) of the random number MR1 for display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random value MR3 for variation category determination are read out and temporarily stored (step S232). That is, when there is a hold (hold data) of the second special view game, the CPU 103 holds the second special view hold storage unit as the hold data of the variation regardless of whether the first special view game is hold or not. Read the numerical data corresponding to the hold number “1” of 151 B (early (oldest) hold data of the second special view game extracted in step S 217) and temporarily store it in a variation random number buffer etc. .

  Subsequent to the process of step S232, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the second special view reserve storage number stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 (see FIG. 8), and the second special view reserve storage unit 151B (figure 8) is shifted (step S233). Specifically, in the process of step S233, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the second reserve storage number count value, and an entry lower than the reserve number "1" in the second special view reserve storage unit 151B (e.g. The pending data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries corresponding to “2” to “4” are shifted upward by one entry. In addition, in the process of step S233, the CPU 103 may subtract 1 from the total pending storage number count value. Following the process of step S233, the CPU 103 updates the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the storage value of the variation special figure designation buffer, to "2" (step S234).

  If it is determined in step S231 that the second special map reservation storage count is "0" (step S231; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special view reservation storage count is "0" or not. It determines (step S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special view game is suspended. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage count counter and determines whether the read value is "0". Just do it.

  If it is determined in step S235 that the number of first special drawing reservations is not "0" (step S235; NO), the CPU 103 selects a special drawing from the holding number "1" of the first special drawing reservation storage unit 151A. The reserved data (numerical data) of the random number MR1 for display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random value MR3 for variation category determination are read out and temporarily stored (step S236). That is, when there is no hold (hold data) of the second special view game (step S 231 (YES)) and there is a hold of the first special view game, the CPU 103 holds the change as the hold data. The numerical data corresponding to the hold number “1” of the first special view hold storage unit 151A (the earliest (oldest) hold data of the first special view game extracted in step S217) is read out and the random number buffer for variation Temporarily store in etc.

  Subsequent to the process of step S236, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the first special view hold storage number stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 (see FIG. 8), and the first special view hold storage unit 151A (see FIG. 8) is shifted (step S237). Specifically, in the process of step S237, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first pending storage number count value, and an entry lower than the pending number "1" in the first special view pending storage unit 151A (for example, the pending number) The pending data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries corresponding to “2” to “4” are shifted upward by one entry. In addition, in the process of step S 237, the CPU 103 may subtract 1 from the total pending storage number count value. Subsequent to the process of step S237, the CPU 103 updates the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the storage value of the variation special figure designation buffer, to "1" (step S238).

  As described above, since the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the number of second special view reservations is "0", the first special view game and the second special view are executed. When the game is on hold, the second special view game is executed prior to the first special view game. In addition, it is not limited to the aspect in which the second special view game is executed with priority over the first special view game, and the game ball enters (passes through the start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) ) And the special figure game (first special figure game, second special figure game) may be executed in the order in which the start winning prize (first start prize, second start prize) occurs. In this case, it is sufficient to provide a table for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the start winning is generated, and to determine from the stored data which one of the first special figure game and the second special figure game is to be executed.

  After executing the process of step S234 or the process of step S238, the CPU 103 sets (selects) a special-image display result determination table according to the current gaming state (step S239). For example, the CPU 103 may set the special view display result determination table, as in step S405 of the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. When different display result determination tables (first special view display result determination table and second special view display result determination table) are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, in the process of step S405, the starting opening buffer Although the value (“1” or “2”) is referred to, in the process of step S239, the variation special figure designation buffer value (“1” or “2”) may be referred to.

  Subsequently, the CPU 103 displays the special view based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special view display result determination stored in the random number buffer for variation and the special view display result decision table set in step S239. The result is determined (step S240). In the process of step S240, CPU 103, similarly to step S406 of the winning random number value determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. 16, the numerical data indicating random number value MR1 and the special figure display result set in step S239. The special chart display result ("big hit" or "miss") is determined by comparing each judgment value assigned to the special chart display result of "big hit" in the determination table data one by one, etc. do it.

  Following the process of step S240, the CPU 103 determines whether the special map display result determined in step S240 is a "big hit" (step S241). If it is determined in step S241 that the "big hit" is made (step S241; YES), the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to the on state (step S242). The big hit flag is cleared (reset) to the off state in the big hit end process of step S117. Following the process of step S242, the CPU 103 executes a jackpot type determination process (S244). The big hit type determination process of step S244 is the same as the big hit type determination process performed in step S407 of the winning random number value determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. Following the jackpot type determination process of step S244, the CPU 103 corresponds to the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process of step S244, for example, the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 A big hit type buffer value is set (step S245). That is, it stores what the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process of step S244 is. As an example, the CPU 103 sets “1” to the big hit type buffer value if the big hit type determined in the big hit type determination process of step S244 is “16R positive variation big hit”, and if “8R positive variation big hit”, the big hit type Set "2" to the buffer value.

  If it is determined in step S241 that the game is not a "big hit" (step S241 (NO)) or after the process of step S245 is executed, the CPU 103 further determines whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, and further In response to the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of making the jackpot gaming state, the set special symbol is set (step S248). Following the process of step S248, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special drawing process flag to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and ends the special symbol normal processing.

  If it is determined in step S235 that the number of reserved memories of the special drawing game using the first special drawing is "0" (step S235; YES), the demonstration display setting (step S250) is executed, and the special symbol is displayed. End normal processing. In the demonstration display setting of step S250, for example, a customer waiting demonstration specification command for specifying a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image or the like on the image display device 5 is from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. It is determined whether or not it has been sent. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demonstration display setting is ended.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process (step S111). In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 19, the CPU 103 first determines whether the big hit flag is in the on state (step S250). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variable display result is determined to be the "big hit" in the special symbol normal processing (step S110). If it is determined that the big hit flag is on (step S250; YES), the effect control command (display result designation command) according to the big hit type (16R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit) determined in step S244 Transmission setting is performed (step S251). If it is determined that the big hit flag is not in the on state (step S250; NO), transmission setting of the effect control command (display result specification command) indicating that the player is lost is performed (step S252).

  After executing the process of step S251 or the process of step S252, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base state is established (step S253). If it is determined in step S253 that the high base state is not set (step S253; NO), the CPU 103 sets (selects) variation category determination table data for the low base state according to the special view display result (step S253). Step S254). Specifically, when it is determined that the big hit flag is not in the on state in step S250, the CPU 103 determines the variation category determination table for low base / loss time (variation category determination shown in FIG. 20A). If the table data making up the table is set, and it is determined in step S250 that the big hit flag is in the on state, a low base / big hit variation category determination table (shown in FIG. 20C) Set the table data that constitutes the variation category determination table).

  If it is determined in step S253 that the high base state is set (step S253; YES), the CPU 103 sets (selects) variation category determination table data for the high base state according to the special view display result (step S253). Step S255). Specifically, when the CPU 103 determines in step S250 that the big hit flag is not in the on state, the change category determination table for high base / lost time (change category determination shown in FIG. 20B) If the table data making up the table is set, and it is determined in step S250 that the big hit flag is in the on state, the variation base determination table for high base / big hit is shown in FIG. Set the table data that constitutes the variation category determination table).

  After executing the process of step S254 or the process of step S255, the CPU 103 determines a fluctuation category based on numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation category determination (step S256). Specifically, the CPU 103 stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variable category determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and the number of pending storage numbers of the variable category determination table data set in step S254 or step S255. The variation category that matches the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 may be determined by comparing with the determination value of.

  As an example, in the case where the table data constituting the variation category determination table of FIG. 20A is set in step S254 and the number of pending storages is “0” or “1” (pending storage pertaining to the relevant prize) In the case where there is no pending storage or there is one), the CPU 103 determines that the variation category is “N” when the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category is in the range of “0” to “69”. PA2 is determined, and when it is in the range of "70" to "89", the fluctuation category "PA3" is determined, and when it is in the range of "90" to "98", the fluctuation category "PA4" is determined; When it is "", the variation category "PA5" is determined.

  In the case where the table data constituting the variation category determination table of FIG. 20A is set in step S 254 and the number of pending storages is in the range of “2” or “3” (other than the pending storage relating to the prize) (When there are two or three pending storages), the CPU 103 changes the variation category “PA1” when the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category is in the range of “0” to “3”. To determine the variation category "PA2" when in the range of "4" to "79", and determine the variation category "PA3" when in the range of "80" to "96"; When it is in the range of "98", the variation category "PA4" is determined, and when it is "99", the variation category "PA5" is determined.

  In the case where the table data constituting the variation category determination table of FIG. 20 (A) is set in step S254 and the number of pending storages is in the range of “4” (pending storage is In the case where four pieces exist, the CPU 103 determines the variation category “PA1” when the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category is in the range of “0” to “63”, “64” When it is in the range of "79", the variation category "PA2" is determined, and when it is in the range of "80" to "96", the variation category "PA3" is determined, and it is in the range of "97" to "98" Sometimes, the variation category "PA4" is determined, and when it is "99", the variation category "PA5" is determined.

  When table data forming the variation category determination table of FIG. 20C is set in step S254, the CPU 103 indicates a random number value MR3 for variation category determination regardless of the number of pending storages. When the data is in the range of "0" to "9", the variation category "PB1" is determined, and when the data is in the range of "10" to "59", the variation category "PB3" is determined, "60" to "60" When it is in the range of “89”, the variation category “PB4” is determined, and when it is in the range of “90” to “99”, the variation category “PB5” is determined.

  The same applies to the case where the variation category determination table of FIG. 20B or the table data forming the variation category determination table of FIG. 20D is set in step S255.

  Following the process of step S256, the CPU 103 determines a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation category determined in step S256 and the random value MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination (step S257). In the process of step S257, the CPU 103 sets (selects) the fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the fluctuation category determined in step S256, and the numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination is any fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern may be determined based on whether it is in the range of

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the fluctuation pattern determination table. In the process of step S257, for example, when the fluctuation category "PA2" is determined in step S256, the CPU 103 sets a fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the fluctuation category "PA2" shown in FIG. Select the fluctuation pattern "PA2-1" when the numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination is in the range from "0" to "39", and select the range from "40" to "99". If the variation pattern "PA2-2" is determined. Further, for example, when the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation category “PA3” in step S256, the CPU 103 sets (selects) the fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the fluctuation category “PA3” illustrated in FIG. The fluctuation pattern "PA3-1" is determined when the numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination is in the range of "0" to "79", and fluctuation is performed when in the range of "80" to "99" The pattern "PA3-2" is determined. The same applies to the case where another variation category is determined in step S256.

  The random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern may be extracted at the time of execution of the process, and the step S217 of the start winning process (step S208, step S211) as in the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category. It may be extracted at step S210 (or step S236) of the special symbol normal processing (step S110).

  Subsequent to the process of step S257, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the effect control command (variation pattern specification command) according to the determined fluctuation pattern (step S258). In addition to the fluctuation pattern designation command, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of a first fluctuation start command (or a second fluctuation start command specifying the start of the second special figure game) for specifying the start of the first special figure game. You may Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the special figure fluctuation time timer value according to the fluctuation pattern to the special figure fluctuation time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 (step S259), and the value of the special drawing process flag Is updated to "2" corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step S260), and the variation pattern setting process is ended. When the value of the special view process flag is updated to "2" in step S260, the special symbol variation process is executed when the next timer interrupt occurs.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process (step S113). In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 22, first, the CPU 103 stops the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B and causes the finalized special symbol to be stopped (derived). After that, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S291). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variable display result is determined to be the "big hit" in the special symbol normal processing (step S110). When it is determined that the big hit flag is in the on state (step S291; YES), the CPU 103 sets a big hit start effect waiting time (step S292). For example, in the process of step S 292, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the jackpot start effect waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the process of step S292, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for sending the hit start designation command is a buffer designated by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. It may be stored in the area. Following the process of step S293, the CPU 103 sets the low probability low base state (step S294). In the process of step S294, for example, the CPU 103 may clear each of the high probability flag and the high base flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 and set it in the off state. Note that when the low-probability low-base state has already been established, the process of step S 294 may be omitted. Following the process of step S294, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (step S295), and ends the special symbol stop process.

  If it is determined in step S291 that the big hit flag is not in the on state (step S291; NO), the CPU 103 performs a fluctuation game state transition process (step S296). The CPU 103 executes, for example, the following processing as the variation game state transition processing. First, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a low probability low base state, and if it is not a low probability low base state, adds 1 to the value of the fluctuation number counter. The fluctuation number counter is the number of times the special drawing game is executed after being controlled to the low probability low base state, and is the number of times compared with the number of times ST (number of probability variations) or the number of time saving. The number of times of ST (the number of times of definite variation) is the number of times of execution of the variable display game which executes the definite variation control. The time saving number is the number of times of execution of the variable display game for executing the time saving control. The number of times of ST (the number of times of probability variation) and the number of times of time reduction are set in the big hit end process (step S117). The CPU 103, which has added 1 to the value of the fluctuation counter, compares the value of the fluctuation counter after adding 1 with the number of STs, and when the value of the fluctuation counter is larger than the number of STs, the gaming state is low and low In addition to setting to the base state, it is sufficient to clear the set value of the number of times of ST and the number of times of time saving to “0”. In the present embodiment, since the number of time savings and the number of ST are the same (both 70 times), the value of the fluctuation number counter after one addition may be compared with the number of times reduced. In addition, when the number of times of time saving and the number of times of ST are different, each may be compared individually. That is, the CPU 103 compares the value of the fluctuation number counter after one addition with the number of time reductions, and sets the low base state if the value of the fluctuation number counter is larger than the number of time reductions, and the fluctuation number counter after one addition And the number of times of ST may be compared, and when the value of the fluctuation number counter is larger than the number of times of ST, the state of low probability may be set.

  Subsequent to the changing game state transition process of step S296, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special view process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S297), and the special symbol stop process is ended Do.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process (step S117). In the big hit end process shown in FIG. 23, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit end effect waiting time has elapsed (step S311). As an example, in the big hit opening post process (step S116) shown in FIG. 13, when the value of the special process process flag is updated to "7", the timer initial determined in advance corresponding to the big hit end presentation waiting time A value is set to the gaming control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, the CPU 103 updates, for example, by subtracting 1 from the game control process timer value, and the updated game control process timer value matches the predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed may be determined depending on whether or not it is.

  If it is determined in step S311 that the jackpot end effect waiting time has not elapsed (step S311; NO), the CPU 103 ends the jackpot end processing as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S311 that the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S311; YES), the CPU 103 reads the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S312). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the high certainty flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to the on state, and sets the high certainty state (probable change state) (step S314). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the high base provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to the high base state by, for example, turning it on (step S315). That is, by the processing of step S314 and step S315, when the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is set to the high probability high base state.

  Following the process of step S315, the CPU 103 sets the set value of the number of times of ST (number of positive variations) to 70 times (step S316), and sets the time reduction number to 70 times (step S317). Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the value of the fluctuation number counter, which is compared with the ST number and the time reduction number, to "0" (step S318) and clears (resets) the big hit flag to the off state (step S319). The value of the process flag is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S320), and the big hit end processing is ended.

  In the present embodiment, the set value of the number of STs (the number of definite variations) and the set value of the number of time reductions of 70 are the same value (both 70 times). The number of times may be different from the setting value of 70 times. Further, in the present embodiment, the set value of the number of STs (number of probability variations) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the set value of the number of STs (number of probability variation) in the 16R probability variation big hit are the same value However, the setting value of the number of ST (number of probability variations) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit may be different from the set value of the number of ST (number of probability variation) in 16R probability variation big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting value of the number of time reductions in the case of the 8R probability variation big hit and the setting value of the time reduction number in the case of the 16R probability variation bigness are made the same value (both 70 times). The set value of the number of time savings may be different from the set value of the number of times reduced for the 16R probability variation big hit. In addition, when the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is “1”, the CPU 103 determines that it is a 16R probability variation big hit, and the big hit type buffer value is “2”. You may judge that it is 8R probability variation big hit. In addition, when the set value of ST number (number of probable changes) and time reduction number do not differ between the case of 8R probability variation big hit and 16R probability variation big hit (when making the same value), the process of step S312 (big hit type The reading of the buffer value) may be omitted.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in FIG.

  In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 24, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and installs it on the effect control board 12 Performs register settings and the like for the CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is in the on state (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. If it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is not in the on state (step S72; NO), the process of step S72 is repeatedly performed and the process waits.

  In addition, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 occurs separately from the timer interrupt. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but interrupts using the CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue a prohibited instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, control to be a rendering control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 Capture the signal.

  The effect control command fetched at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  When it is determined in step S72 that the timer interrupt flag is in the on state (step S72; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the timer interrupt flag to be in the off state (step S73), The command analysis process is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main substrate 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read and then read. Settings, control, and the like corresponding to the output control command issued are performed.

  Following the command analysis process of step S74, the effect control CPU 120 executes an error notification process (step S75). In the error notification process of step S75, an error notification or the like corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is performed, for example, for an act of causing the game ball to be illegally guided to the winning opening using a magnet.

  Following the error notification process of step S75, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control process process (step S76). In the effect control process of step S76, various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable object 17, etc.) are used based on the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11. Judgment, determination, setting, and the like related to the rendering operation are performed.

  Following the effect control process of step S76, the effect control CPU 120 executes effect random number updating process (step S77). In the effect random number updating process of step S77, for example, at least a part of the effect random number used on the side of the effect control board 12 is updated by software. As one example, the effect control CPU 120 may update numerical data indicating effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 by software. Thereafter, the process returns to the process of step S72.

  In addition, on the side of the effect control board 12, the interrupt for receiving the effect control command or the like from the main substrate 11 is described as an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. However, the method of generating an interrupt for receiving the effect control command or the like is not limited to the above. For example, an interrupt for receiving a rendering control command or the like may be generated in response to an interrupt request by the first bit of serial communication.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process (step S74). In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 first receives the command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer or the like. It is determined whether there is any (step S501). If it is determined that there is no reception command (step S501; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the command analysis process.

  If it is determined in step S501 that there is a reception command (step S501; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reception command is the first starting opening prize notification command (step S502). . The effect control CPU 120 may check, for example, MODE data of the received command and specify the type of the received command (see FIG. 3).

  If it is determined in step S502 that the command is the first starting opening winning notice command (step S502; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets a first hold storage number notification waiting time (step S503). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may set an initial timer value predetermined as the reception waiting time of the first hold storage number notification command in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the received command is not the first starting opening winning notification command (step S502; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the received command is the second starting opening winning notification command. (Step S504). If it is determined in step S504 that the command is the second starting opening winning notification command (step S504; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets a second hold storage number notification waiting time (step S505). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may set, in the command reception control timer, a timer initial value which is predetermined as the reception waiting time of the second hold storage number notification command.

  If it is determined in step S504 that the received command is not the second starting opening prize notification command (step S504; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the received command is a symbol designation command (step S506). ). If it is determined in step S506 that the received command is not a symbol designation command (step S506; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the received command is a variation category command (step S507). If it is determined in step S507 that the received command is not a change category command (step S507; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the received command is the first hold storage number notification command (step S508). ). If it is determined in step S508 that the command is the first pending storage number notification command (step S508; YES), the first pending storage number notification waiting time, for example, by initializing the clock operation by the command reception control timer. Is cleared (step S509).

  If it is determined in step S508 that the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command (step S508; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the reception command is the second pending storage number notification command. (Step S510). If it is determined in step S510 that the command is the second pending storage number notification command (step S510; YES), the second pending storage number notification waiting time, for example, by initializing the clock operation by the command reception control timer. Is cleared (step S511).

  When it is determined in step S506 that it is a symbol designation command (step S506 (YES)) or when it is determined in step S507 that it is a variation category command (step S507 (YES)), step S503, step S505, After executing any of the processes of steps S509 and S511, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reception command in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A or in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. It stores in the free space in (step S512). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 detects that the reception command is the first starting opening winning notification command, or the starting opening winning notification command immediately before the receiving command is the first starting opening winning notification command. In the case (when the second starting opening winning notification command is not received after receiving the first starting opening winning notification command), the reception command is stored in the empty area in the first starting winning reception command buffer 194A, When the reception command is the second starting opening winning notification command or when the starting opening winning notification command immediately before the receiving command is the second starting opening winning notification command (receive the second starting opening winning notification command If the first start-up winning award notification command has not been received, the second start-up winning reception command buffer 194 is received). Stored in the free space in. Following the process of step S512, the process returns to the process of step S501.

  If it is determined in step S510 that the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command (step S510; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the received command is a fluctuation pattern designation command. (Step S513). If it is determined that it is a fluctuation pattern designation command (step S513; YES), the CPU 201 for effect control stores the fluctuation pattern designation command in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S515). . Following the process of step S515, the process returns to the process of step S501.

  If it is determined in step S513 that the received command is not a fluctuation pattern designation command (step S513; NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting or the like according to each other received command (step S518). For example, when the reception command is a gaming state designation command, the effect control CPU 120 may analyze the gaming state designation command to specify the current gaming state. Following the process of step S518, the process returns to the process of step S501.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the error notification process (step S75). In the error notification process shown in FIG. 26, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether it is an error notification notification period (step S141). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether a notification control pattern corresponding to an error notification (which may have the same configuration as the effect control pattern shown in FIG. 9) is already set as a use pattern, If it is already set, it may be determined whether it is a notification period of error notification based on the set content (timing of notification etc.) and the value of the effect control process timer.

  When it is not the notification period of the error notification in step S141 (step S141; NO), the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the magnetic abnormality notification designation command has been received (step S142). If the magnetic abnormality notification designation command has not been received (step S142; NO), the error notification process is ended.

  When the magnetic abnormality notification designation command is received in step S142 (step S142; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes (starts) operation control of the error notification in the highest layer (Z value = 0). (Step S143), the error notification process is ended. Further, even in the notification period of the error notification in step S141 (step S141; YES), the operation control of the error notification is executed (continue) in the top layer (Z value = 0) (step S143), The error notification process is ended. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets the notification control pattern corresponding to the error notification of the magnetic abnormality as the usage pattern, and also displays the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set notification control pattern. The error notification image (FIG. 27A, FIG. 27B, and FIG. 28A) corresponding to the error notification of the magnetic abnormality is displayed by transmitting to the VDP of the display control unit 123 or the like.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of Z values and the like of various images. FIG. 27A is a diagram exemplifying an image (image name) and an image size (display region of an image) corresponding to each effect, notification, and the like performed in the display region of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 27A, when executing error notification, an error notification image of the image size “large” is displayed in the display area. In other words, the error notification is executed using the error notification image of the image size “large”. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 27A, presentation execution notification is executed using the presentation execution notification image of the image size “small”, and the combination effect of the image size “large” using the character effect effect image The effect is executed, the hold etc. display (hold display, active display) is executed using the display image of the image size "small", etc., and the group notice effect is executed using the group advance effect image of the image size "large" The chance zone effect is performed using the chance zone effect image of the image size “small”, and the step up notification effect is performed using the step up notice effect image of the image size “large”.

  Note that the effect execution notification shown in FIG. 27A is notification that the notification target effect has been executed. In the present embodiment, each of step 5 (SU5) of the step-up notice effect, the group notice effect, and the feature effect corresponds to the notification object effect. That is, in the present embodiment, when SU5 is executed, it is notified that SU5 is executed as the effect execution notification, and when the group preview effect is executed, it is informed that the group preview effect is executed When the feature effect is executed, it is informed that the feature effect is executed.

  FIG. 27B is a diagram exemplifying the Z values set for the respective images shown in FIG. The RAM 122 stores a Z-value setting table in which the Z-values of the respective images shown in FIG. 27A are set. As shown in FIG. 27B, in the Z value setting table, the Z value of each image is set. The Z value indicates a layer that displays an image. As the Z value is smaller, the image is displayed on the front side (front side, upper side) layer in the depth direction, and as the Z value is larger, the back side in the depth direction (back side, lower side) The image is displayed on the layer of. Therefore, for example, when the error notification image of Z value “0” and the chance zone effect image of Z value “7” are superimposed and displayed in FIG. 27B, the chance of Z value “7” is displayed. An error notification image of Z value "0" is displayed in front of the zone effect image. Also, for example, when the group preliminary effect image of Z value “6”, the chance zone effect image of Z value “7”, and the step-up advance effect image of Z value “8” are displayed in a superimposed manner, the Z value The chance zone effect image of Z value "7" is displayed in front of the step-up notice effect image of "8", and the group notice effect image of Z value "6" is in front of the chance zone effect image of Z value "7" Is displayed. In addition, the above-mentioned image and Z value are examples. For example, the Z value of the decorative pattern (image of the variable display effect of the decorative pattern) is "9", and the Z value of the background (background image) is "10".

  Note that the Z value of the effect execution notification image shown in FIG. 27B starts to be notified when the notification number is 3 (when the execution of three effects of SU5, group advance effect, and feature effect is notified) When the order is the third, the notification start order is 2 in the case of “1” and the notification number 2 or more (in the case of notifying execution of two or more effects among SU5, group advance effect and feature effect) When it is the second "2", the notification start order is the first in the case where the notification number is 1 or more (when the execution of one or more effects among SU5, group notice effect, and feature effect is notified) Sometimes it is "3".

  FIG. 28 and FIG. 29 are diagrams showing examples of various images. FIG. 28A shows an error notification image (an example). The error notification image shown in FIG. 28A includes a pictogram image G1 notifying that an error has occurred, and a character image G2 notifying a message of “error occurrence! Please call a staff member”. The display time of the error notification image (error notification notification time) may be, for example, 30 seconds. The display time of the error notification image may be varied according to the type of error.

  The image size of the error notification image shown in FIG. 27A is a display area obtained by combining the display area of the pictogram image G1 and the display area of the character image G2. That is, the display area obtained by combining the display area of the pictogram image G1 and the display area of the character image G2 is "large". The pictogram image G1 and the character image G2 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 28A, and are compared with other images (or without comparison with other images), and the image of the error notification image It is sufficient if the size can be said to be "large". Note that an image having an image size falling in a predetermined upper order (for example, the fourth) may be referred to as an image size “large”, and an image not including the upper predetermined order may be referred to as an image size “small”. In addition, an image having a ratio of an image size to a display area of the image display device 5 of more than a predetermined ratio (for example, 30%) is referred to as an image size “large” and an image less than the predetermined ratio is referred to as an image size Good.

  FIG. 28B shows an effect execution notification image (an example). The effect execution notification image shown in FIG. 28 (B) is a pictogram image G3 in which the notification object effect (step 5 (SU5) of the step-up notice effect, group notice effect, feature effect) is notified in an identifiable manner. It contains. The pictogram image G3 is a generic name for part or all of the pictogram image G3-1 to pictogram image G3-3 (described later). The display time of the presentation execution notification image (the notification time of presentation execution notification) may be, for example, 20 seconds. The display time of the effect execution notification image may be varied according to the type of notification target effect.

  The image size of the effect execution notification image shown in FIG. 27A is the display area of the pictogram image G3. That is, the display area of the pictogram image G3 is "small". The pictogram image G3 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 28B, and the image size of the effect execution notification image is “compared with other images (or without comparison with other images). Anything that can be said to be small is acceptable.

  FIG. 28 (D) shows in detail the vicinity of the pictogram image G3 of FIG. 28 (B). In FIG. 28 (D), in the case of the notification number 3, the pictogram image G3-1 notifies the first effect of notification start order, and the Z value is “3”. Further, in FIG. 28D, the pictogram image G3-2 reports the effect whose notification start order is the second in the case of the notification number 3, and the Z value is “2”. Further, in FIG. 28D, the pictogram image G3-3 is for notifying the third effect in the notification start order in the case of the notification number 3, and the Z value is “1”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28D, the pictogram image G3-2 of Z value "2" is displayed in front of the pictogram image G3-1 of Z value "3", and the pictogram image G3 of Z value "2" is displayed. The pictogram image G3-3 of Z value "1" is displayed on the front of -2.

  In FIG. 28E, the pictogram image G3-1 is for notifying the first effect of notification start order in the case of the notification number 2, and the Z value is “3”. Further, in FIG. 28E, the pictogram image G3-2 reports the effect whose notification start order is the second in the case of the notification number 2, and the Z value is “2”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28E, the pictogram image G3-2 with the Z value "2" is displayed in front of the pictogram image G3-1 with the Z value "3". Further, in FIG. 28F, in the case of the notification number 1, the pictogram image G3-1 notifies the first effect in the notification start order, and the Z value is “3”.

  FIG. 28 (C) shows a feature effect effect image (one example). The combination effect effect image shown in FIG. 28C includes an effect image G4 that gives an image effect to the combination effect (specifically, the movement (falling) of the movable combination 17). The display time of the role effect effect image (the execution time of the effect effect effect) may be, for example, 30 seconds. Depending on the operation mode of the movable character 17, the display time of the character effect effect image may be varied.

  The image size of the combination effect effect image shown in FIG. 27A is the display area of the effect image G4. That is, the display area of the effect image G4 is "large". The effect image G4 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 28C, and the image size of the role effect effect image is compared with other images (or without comparison with other images). Anything that can be said to be "large" is acceptable.

  FIG. 29A shows a display image (one example) for holding and the like. The suspension display image shown in FIG. 29A includes a first suspension display image G5, a second suspension display image G6, and an active display image G7. The display time of the first hold display image G5 or the second hold display image G6 differs depending on the number of the hold display, the digestion time of each hold display (display time of each variable display), and the like. The display time of the active display image G7 differs depending on the display time of the variable display and the like. Note that the hold etc. display image may include an image showing the active display area AHA.

  The image size of the hold etc. display image shown in FIG. 27A is a display area obtained by combining the display area of the first hold display image G5, the display area of the second hold display image G6 and the display area of the active display image G7. It is. That is, the display area obtained by combining the display area of the first hold display image G5, the display area of the second hold display image G6, and the display area of the active display image G7 is "small". The first hold display image G5, the second hold display image G6, and the active display image G7 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 29A, and are compared with other plural images (or other plural images). What is necessary is that it can be said that the image size of the display image for holding etc. is “small” (without comparison).

  FIG. 29B shows a group preview effect image (an example). The group preview effect image shown in FIG. 29B includes character images G8 that constitute a group. The display time of the character image G8 (the execution time of the group preview effect) may be, for example, 5 seconds. The display time of the group preview effect image may be varied according to the character image G8 displayed in the group preview effect.

  The image size of the group preview effect image shown in FIG. 27B is the display area of the character image G8. That is, the display area of the character image G8 is "large". The character image G8 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 29B, and the image size of the group preview effect image is “compared with other images (or without comparison with other images) It can be said to be large.

  FIG. 29C shows a chance zone effect image (an example). The chance zone effect image shown in FIG. 29C includes a character image G9 for notifying a message of “chance !!” and a pictogram image G10 for notifying that it is a chance. The chance zone effect image may include one of the character image G9 and the pictogram image G10. The display time of character image G9 or pictogram image G10 (execution time of chance zone effect) differs depending on the number of hold displays, the digestion time of each hold display (display time of each variable display), and the like.

  The image size of the chance zone effect image shown in FIG. 27B is a display area obtained by combining the display area of the character image G9 and the display area of the pictogram image G10. That is, the display area obtained by combining the display area of the character image G9 and the display area of the pictogram image G10 is "small". The character image G9 and the pictogram image G10 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 29C, and are compared with other plural images (or without comparison with other plural images), in It is sufficient if the image size can be said to be "small".

  FIG. 29D shows a step-up notice effect image (an example). The step-up notice effect image includes a frame image G11 displayed last in step 1 (SU1), a frame image G12 displayed last in step 2 (SU2), a frame image G13 displayed last in step 3 (SU3), and The frame image G14 displayed last in 4 (SU4), the frame image G15 displayed last in step 5 (SU5), and the like are included. That is, the display area is expanded each time the step-up is performed. In the frame image G11 to the frame image G15, characters and the like are displayed according to SU1 to SU5, but are not illustrated. Note that the display time of each of the frame image G11 to the frame image G15 may be, for example, 1 second (therefore, for example, 5 seconds when advancing to SU5).

  The image size of the step-up notice effect image shown in FIG. 27 (B) is based on the display area of the frame image G15. That is, the display area of the frame image G15 is "large". The frame image G15 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 29D, and the image size of the step-up notice effect image is compared with other images (or without comparison with other images). Anything that can be said to be "large" is acceptable.

  FIG. 30 is a conceptual view schematically showing layers of various images. In FIG. 30, the numbers on the Z axis are Z values. According to the setting of the Z value shown in FIG. 27B, as shown in FIG. 30, the error notification image having the Z value "0" is displayed on the foremost layer, and the effect having the Z value "1". The execution notification image (third) is displayed in the layer on the back of the error notification image, and the presentation execution notification image (second) having the Z value “2” is the back of the one on the presentation execution notification image (third) The effect execution notification image (first) displayed on the layer and having the Z value “3” is displayed on the layer on the back of one of the effect execution notification images (second) and has the Z value “4” The image is displayed in the layer on the back of one of the effect execution notification images (third), and the display image of the hold etc. having the Z value “5” is displayed on the layer on the back of the feature effect effect image, the Z value “ Group notice effect image with 6 "is one back of the display image such as hold The chance zone effect image having the Z value “7” is displayed on one layer of the group notice effect image, and the step-up notice effect image having the Z value “8” is the group notice effect image of It is displayed in the layer behind one.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the display area of the image display device 5. 31A shows the display operation in the image display device 5 when the execution periods of the step-up notice effect (SU4), chance zone effect, group notice effect, hold etc. display, and effect execution notification (group notice effect) overlap. An example is shown. FIG. 31B shows step-up notice effect (SU5), chance zone effect, group notice effect, display such as hold, feature effect effect, effect execution notification (SU5), effect execution notification (group notice effect), effect execution The example of a display operation | movement in the image display apparatus 5 when the execution period of alerting | reporting (feature effect) overlaps is shown. As shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, an image having a large Z value is drawn on the back side according to the Z value of FIG. 27B, and an image having a small Z value is on the front side. It is drawn to overlap with.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S76). In the effect control process shown in FIG. 32, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prize effect determination process (step S150). In the effect determination process at the time of winning, the CPU 120 for effect control first checks the storage content in the start winning time reception command buffer (the first start winning time reception command buffer 194A or the second start winning time reception command buffer 194B) or As the reception command, processing of determining whether or not the starting opening winning a prize notification command has been received, processing of determining the effect such as holding, and the like are executed.

  Subsequent to the prize effect determination process (step S150), the effect control CPU 120 selects any one of the processes in steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like. And run.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”, which is the initial value. The variable display start waiting process displays an image based on whether or not the first variation start command (or the second variation start command), the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main substrate 11 are received. It includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of the decorative design in the device 5 or the like. In the variable display start waiting process, when it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol is to be started (that is, when the fluctuation pattern designation command or the like is received), the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "1".

  The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". The variable display start setting process is a setting for performing variable display of the decorative symbol in the image display device 5 (for example, corresponding to variable display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B) , And processing for performing the effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation time) and setting of the value of the fluctuation time timer, etc., and for performing display operations such as the first hold display, the second hold display, and the active display. A process of setting (for example, setting of a rendering control pattern corresponding to the display operation) is included. In the variable display start setting process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

  The variable display effect process of step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". During the variable display effect processing, whether or not the fluctuation time timer set in the variable display start setting processing (step S171) has timed out (the elapsed time after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 special pattern fluctuation time Processing to determine whether or not In the variable display effect process, when the fluctuation time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The process for waiting for a special figure in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3." The special process per wait processing is a process to be executed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set as the process to be executed when the finalized decoration symbol is "losing", or when the finalized ornament pattern is "big hit" The processing to be performed includes processing for performing setting for performing fanfare production (for example, setting of a production control pattern corresponding to the fanfare production, etc.). In the waiting process per special drawing, when the finalized decoration symbol is "loss", the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and when the finalized ornament pattern is "big hit", Update the value to "4".

  The jackpot start process of step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". The jackpot start process is a process of determining whether or not the big winning opening open notification command has been received, or a process being executed when the large winning opening open notification command is received, an effect being released (special variable winning in each round It includes processing for performing setting (for example, setting of an effect control pattern corresponding to an effect being released, etc.) for performing effects to be executed when the ball device 7 is in the open state. In the big hit start process, when the big winning opening open notification command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

  The process in the round of step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". Processing during the round is processing to determine whether or not the notification command after the big winning a prize opening has been received, and the processing being executed when the notification command after the big winning a prize opening is received is closed effect (special variable winning in each round It includes a process for setting (for example, setting of an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect during closing) and the like for performing an effect to be executed when the ball device 7 is in the closed state. In the process during the round, when the notification command after the opening of the special winning opening is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6”.

  The post-round process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". The round post-processing performs processing during open processing as processing to determine whether or not the special winning opening open notification command or hit termination designation command has been received, or processing to be executed when the special winning opening opening notification command is received. Processing for performing setting (for example, setting of a production control pattern corresponding to an effect during opening) or setting for performing ending effect as processing to be executed when a hit end designation command is received (for example, for ending effect) It includes the process of setting the value of the corresponding effect control pattern, the value of the ending effect execution time timer, and the like. In the round post process, when the special winning opening open notification command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5", and when the hit end designation command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7" Do.

  The jackpot end post-processing in step S177 is processing that is executed when the value of the rendering process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end post-processing, whether the ending effect execution time timer set in the round post-processing (step S176) has timed out (whether the elapsed time after the start of the end effect execution in the image display device 5 has reached the set time Processing to determine the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a high probability high base state as processing to determine whether or not the ending production execution time timer has timed out (provided in the production control flag setting unit 191 And the process of setting the number of times of ST and the number of times of time saving, and the like. In the big hit end post processing, when the ending effect execution time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process (S150) at the time of winning. In the effect determination process at the time of winning shown in FIG. 33, the CPU 120 for effect control first stores the contents of the reception command buffer at start winning (the first start winning reception command buffer 194A or the second start winning reception command buffer 194B). Is checked (step S151), and it is determined whether or not the first starting opening winning combination designation command has been received as a new reception command (step S152). When it is determined in step S152 that the first starting opening winning combination designation command has not been received (step S152; NO), the effect control CPU 120 checks the storage content in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B ( Step S153) It is determined whether or not the second starting opening winning combination designation command has been received as a new reception command (step S153). When it is determined in step S154 that the second starting opening winning combination designation command has not been received (step S154; NO), the effect determination processing at the time of winning is ended.

  When it is determined in step S152 that the first starting opening winning combination designation command has been received (step S152; YES), the CPU for effect control 120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 Then, it is determined whether or not it is a short time state (high probability high base state) (step S152). When it is determined that the time saving state is not set (step S155: NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect determining process such as holding (step S160A). A process of determining the display mode of the first suspension display in the first start winning storage display area 5HL (specifically, the suspension of the first startup winning storage display area 5HL, etc.) A process of determining the presence or absence of execution, and a process of determining an effect pattern such as hold when it is determined to be executed is included. Details will be described later.

  After executing the on-hold effect determination process (step S160A), the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the on-off effect determination process (step S160B). Specifically, for example, when the CPU 120 for effect control determines to execute an effect such as suspension in the effect determination process such as suspension in step S160A, the effect pattern such as the suspension determined in the effect determination process such as suspension in step S160A The information indicating the display mode (that is, the display mode at the time of addition and after shift specified by the hold etc. effect pattern) corresponds to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. It stores it in association with the buffer number of the first read advance notice buffer 194C. Further, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute effects such as hold and the like in the effect determination process such as hold and the like in step S160A, a normal display mode (for example, white) is displayed as a display mode at the time of addition and after each shift. ) Is stored in association with the buffer number of the first read advance notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning received command command buffer 194A.

  After executing the process of step S160B, the effect control CPU 120 executes the chance zone effect determination process (step S161A), and stores the determined content of the chance zone effect (step S161B). Details of the chance zone effect determination process will be described later.

  After executing the process of step S161B, the effect control CPU 120 adds a first hold display based on the determination content stored in step S160B (step S162). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 executes (starts) operation control of adding the first hold display to the first start winning storage display area 5HL in the sixth layer (Z value = 5) from the upper rank. More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first hold display according to the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first preread notice buffer 194C described above to the first start winning storage display area 5HL. The effect control pattern to be displayed is set as a usage pattern, and a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern set is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. 27A (FIG. 27A, FIG. 27B, and FIG. 29A) is displayed by adding the first first suspension display. Then, the effect determination process at the time of winning is finished.

  When it is determined in step S154 that the second starting opening winning combination designation command is received (step S154; YES), the CPU for effect control 120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 Then, it is determined whether or not it is a short time state (high probability high base state) (step S156). When it is determined that the time saving state (high probability high base state) (step S156: YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination processing such as holding (step S163A). The on-hold effect determination process in step S163A is the same as the on-hold effect determination process in step S160A. That is, the processing for determining the display mode of the second hold display in the second start winning storage display area 5HR (specifically, the hold in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, etc. in the hold etc. effect determination processing in step S163A A process of determining the presence or absence of an effect, and a process of determining an effect pattern such as hold when it is determined to execute is included.

  After executing the on-hold etc. effect determining process (step S163A), the effect control CPU 120 executes the processes of step S163B, step S164A, step S164B, and step S165, and ends the winning time effect determining process. In addition, each processing of Step S163B, Step S164A, Step S164B, and Step S165 concerning the 2nd starting opening winning is the same as each processing of Step S160B, Step S161A, Step S161B, and Step S162 concerning 1st starting opening winning. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  When it is determined in step S155 that the time saving state is determined (step S155: YES), or when it is determined in step S156 that the time saving state is not (step S156: NO), the suspension addition process according to the start opening winning combination designation (S166). Specifically, when the first starting opening winning combination designation command has been received (step S152: YES, step S155: YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes effects such as holding in the effect determining process such as holding in step S160A. Similarly to the case where it is determined not to be stored, information indicating a normal display mode (for example, white) is stored as a display mode upon addition and after each shift, and the first hold display displayed in the normal display mode is started at the first start It adds to prize memory display area 5HL. Then, the effect determination process at the time of winning is finished. On the other hand, when the second starting opening winning combination designation command has been received (step S154: YES, step S156: NO), the CPU 120 for effect control determines that the effect such as on hold is not executed in the effect determination process on step etc. In the same manner as in the above case, information indicating the normal display mode (for example, white) is stored as the display mode at the time of addition and after each shift, and the second hold display displayed in the normal display mode is the second start winning memory display Add to area 5HR. Then, the effect determination process at the time of winning is finished.

  FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the process of determining the effect such as holding (steps S160A and S163A). FIG. 34 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a hold etc. effect determination process. In the hold determination etc. effect determination process shown in FIG. 34 (A), the effect control CPU 120 first makes a plurality of hold etc. hold effect execution presence / absence decision tables (non-specific pattern (missing) hold etc.) stored in the ROM 121 Effect execution presence / absence determination table, Hold for performance etc. presence / absence decision table for specific pattern (loss), Hold for etc. performance execution presence / absence decision table for non-specific pattern (big hit), Execution such as hold etc. for specific pattern (big hit) From the table), select a staging etc. execution execution presence / absence decision table according to the fluctuation category command (non-specific pattern (loss), specific pattern (loss), non-specific pattern (big hit), specific pattern (big hit)) And set (step S9000).

  FIG. 34 (B) is an explanatory view for explaining a determination ratio of presence / absence of effect such as holding. According to the example shown in FIG. 34 (B), execution non-execution presence of the effect such as holding is determined based on the variation category command. That is, when it is a non-specific pattern (loss), non-execution is determined at a rate of 90% and execution is determined at a rate of 10%. When it is a specific pattern (loss), non-execution is determined at a rate of 70%, and execution is determined at a rate of 30%. When it is a non-specific pattern (big hit), non-execution is determined at a rate of 60% and execution is determined at a rate of 40%. When it is a specific pattern (big hit), non-execution is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution at a rate of 80%.

  In each of the pending etc. effects execution presence / absence determination tables, “execution non” and “execution present” are made so that “execution non” and “execution present” are determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 34 (B). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determination of presence / absence of effect execution is set to each of them. For example, in the holding execution effect presence / absence determination table for non-specific patterns (loss), "execution non" is determined at a rate of 90%, and "execution is" is determined at a rate of 10%, " A numerical value to be compared with a random value for determination of presence / absence of execution of presentation etc. is assigned to each of “no execution” and “execution present”. In the hold etc. effect execution presence / absence decision table for a specific pattern (loss), "execution non" is determined at a rate of 70% and "execution non" is determined at a rate of 30%, "execution non" A numerical value to be compared with a random number value for determination of presence / absence of effect execution is assigned to each of & and " execution present ". In the hold etc. non-specific pattern (big hit) hold etc. production execution presence or absence determination table, "execution non" is determined at a rate of 60% and "execution non" is determined at a rate of 40%. A numerical value to be compared with a random value for determining whether or not to execute a presentation effect such as holding is assigned to each of "and" ". In the table for holding or not performing staging etc. for specific patterns (big hits), "no execution" is determined at a rate of 20%, and "execution is" determined at a rate of 80%, "no execution" A numerical value to be compared with a random number value for determination of presence / absence of effect execution is assigned to each of & and " execution present ". In addition, the random value for determination of presence / absence of presentation execution determination may be updated, for example, in the random number updating process for presentation (step S77).

  Subsequent to the process of step S9000, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the effect such as holding on the basis of the random number value for determining the presence or absence of the effect execution such as holding (step S9001). That is, CPU 120 for production control, numerical value data which shows the random number value for the execution execution presence / absence decision such as retention etc, the decision value of “execution non existence” or “execution presence” in the suspension etc execution effect presence / absence decision table which was set in step S9000 To determine the presence or absence of the execution of the effect such as holding.

  Following the process of step S 9001, the CPU for effect control 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute an effect such as hold (step S 9002). If it is determined that the effect such as holding is to be performed (step S 9002; YES), the effect control CPU 120 holds the number of held storages (prize is held from among the plurality of types of hold etc. effect pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 121 A hold etc. effect pattern determination table corresponding to the number of items is selected and set according to the change category command (step S9003). That is, CPU 120 for effect control, when winning is the first hold (the first hold in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, or the first hold in the second start winning storage display area 5HR) The hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the first hold is set, and the winning is held for the second hold (the second hold for the first start winning memory display area 5HL, or the second hold for the second start prize memory display area 5HR) If it is the first one, the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the second hold is set, and the winning is the third hold (the third hold in the first start winning display area 5HL, or the second start) If it is the third on hold in the prize storage display area 5HR), the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the third on hold is set, and the fourth prize on hold (first start prize display indication D) Hold 4 th in A 5HL, or sets a hold like effect pattern determination table for holding a fourth point when a hold 4 th) in the second start winning storage display area 5HR.

  Subsequent to the process of step S9003, the effect control CPU 120 determines an effect pattern such as an on-hold based on a random number value for determining an effect pattern such as an on-hold (step S9004). That is, the effect control CPU 120 compares, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the pending etc. rendering pattern with the determination value of the respective pending etc etc. rendering pattern in the pending etc. rendering pattern determination table set in step S9003 The first hold etc. production pattern is decided. Then, the processing such as holding etc. is ended. In addition, the random number value for determination of a presentation pattern etc. may be updated, for example, in the random number updating process for presentation (step S77).

  On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the effect such as hold (step S9002; NO), the CPU 120 for effect control displays white as the display mode upon addition of the hold display and after each shift and the active display ( A normal display mode is determined (step S9005). Then, the processing such as holding etc. is ended.

  FIG. 35 is an explanatory view for explaining an effect pattern or the like on hold. FIG. 35A shows an example of an effect pattern (for example, on hold) determined by the on-hold effect pattern determination table for the third hold. That is, when it is determined that the effect such as on hold is to be performed in the on hold etc. effect determination process to be executed when the winning is the third on hold (step S9002; YES), a plurality of the hold shown in FIG. The one pending etc. producing pattern is determined from among the etc. producing patterns (for example, holding etc. producing patterns “HP1” to “HP14”).

  In FIG. 35 (A), the "display mode of the hold display at the position of the third hold" in the figure is a display mode of the hold display at the position before the first shift after the additional display. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display at a position three stops before the first start winning memory display area 5HL, or the second hold at a position three stops before the second start winning memory display area 5HR. It is a display mode of display. The “display mode of the hold display at the second hold position” in the drawing is a display mode of the hold display at the position after the first shift and before the second shift. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display at a position two stops before the first start winning memory display area 5HL, or the second hold at a position two stops before the second start winning memory display area 5HR. It is a display mode of display. The “display mode of the hold display at the first hold position” in the drawing is the display mode of the hold display at the position after the second shift and before the third shift. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display at the position one digest before the first start winning memory display area 5HL, or the second hold at the position one digest before the second start prize memory display area 5HR. It is a display mode of display.

  In FIG. 35 (A), for example, the holding etc. effect pattern “HP1” displays white as the holding display of the third holding position, displays white as the holding display of the second holding position, and holds 1 This is an effect pattern such as a hold that displays white as a hold display of the second position and displays yellow as an active display. The display pattern "HP2" for holding etc. displays white as a holding display for the third holding position, displays white as a holding display for the second holding position, and yellow as a holding display for the first holding position. It is an effect pattern such as holding and displaying yellow and displaying yellow as active display. The reserve etc. effect pattern "HP3" displays white as a reserve display of the third reserve position, yellow as a reserve display of the second reserve position, and yellow as a reserve display of the first reserve position. It is an effect pattern such as holding and displaying yellow and displaying yellow as active display. The holding pattern etc. “HP 4” to “HP 14” are also as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 35 (A) shows the hold etc. effect pattern determined by the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the third held, but the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the first hold Hold etc. effect pattern to be determined, hold etc. effect pattern determined by hold etc. effect pattern determination table for second hold, hold etc. effect determined by fourth hold peg etc. effect pattern determination table The same applies to patterns.

  For example, the presentation pattern for suspension etc. determined by the presentation pattern determination table for suspension 1st etc. is “display mode of the suspension display at the first position of suspension” and “display mode of suspension display for active display” Should be set. The presentation patterns for holding etc. determined by the holding etc. effect pattern determination table for the second held product are “display mode of the held display at the second held position” and “display mode of the held display at the first held position” And “display mode of the display on hold of the active display” may be set. The hold etc. effect pattern determined by the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the fourth hold is “display mode of the hold display at the fourth hold position” and “display mode of the hold display at the third hold position” If “display mode of the hold display at the second hold position”, “display mode of the hold display at the first hold position” and “display mode of the hold display of the active display” are set. Just do it.

  FIG. 35 (B) shows an example of the determination ratio of the holding etc. effect pattern by the holding etc. effect pattern determination table for the third held. According to the example shown in FIG. 35 (B), effects such as holding are performed according to the variation category command (non-specific pattern (loss), specific pattern (loss), non-specific pattern (big hit), specific pattern (big hit)). The ratio of pattern determination is different. In the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the third hold, one hold etc. effect pattern from among the hold etc. effect patterns “HP1” to “HP14” corresponds to FIG. Each of the hold etc. effect patterns “HP1” to “HP14” is compared with a random number value (not shown) for hold etc. effect pattern determination according to the variation category command, as determined by the ratio as shown in). It is sufficient if assigned numerical values (decision values).

  For example, in the table to be referred to when it is the specific pattern (loss), each of the reserve etc. effect patterns “HP1” to “HP4” is determined at a ratio of 23%, and the reserve etc. effect patterns “HP5” to “HP12” As long as each is determined at a rate of 1%, it is only necessary to assign a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the presentation pattern to be held etc. . In addition, in the table to be referred to when the non-specific pattern (big hit), the pending etc. effect patterns “HP1” to “HP4” are each determined at a ratio of 20%, and the pending etc. effect pattern “HP5” to “HP14 If each numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for holding etc. presentation pattern determination is assigned to each holding etc. presentation pattern so that each of “is determined at a rate of 2%. Good.

  In addition, the determination ratio of the presentation pattern such as suspension by the presentation pattern determination table for the first suspension etc., the determination ratio of presentation pattern such as the suspension etc. by the presentation pattern determination table for the second suspension etc, the fourth Although the rate of determining the pending etc. presentation pattern by the pending etc. presentation pattern determination table is omitted, it is the first on hold and the third on hold also the fourth on hold, and the third on hold In the same manner as in the above case, any hold effect pattern may be determined.

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the chance zone effect determination process (steps S161A and S164A). FIG. 36A is a flowchart showing an example of the chance zone effect determination process. In the chance zone effect determination process shown in FIG. 36A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning is the third or fourth (step S9010). When it is determined that the winning is not the third or fourth (step S9010; NO), that is, when the winning is the first or second, the chance zone effect determining process is ended.

  If it is determined that the third or fourth prize is won (step S9010; YES), the CPU for effect control 120 determines whether or not it is a chance zone effect period (period in which chance zone effect is being executed). (Step S9011). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect is already set as the use pattern, or the set content when the use pattern is already set (execution timing etc. Whether or not it is a chance zone presentation period may be determined based on the value of the presentation control process timer) and. If it is determined that it is a chance zone effect period (step S9011; YES), the chance zone effect determination process is ended.

  If it is determined that it is not a chance zone presentation period (step S9011; NO), the production control CPU 120 has decided on a chance zone presentation execution decision (a situation where it is decided to execute a chance zone presentation but it has not been executed yet It is determined whether or not (step S9012). For example, the effect control CPU 120 associates information with any of the buffer numbers of the first pre-reading notice buffer 194C (or the second pre-reading notice buffer 194D) and indicates information indicating that it is a chance zone effect target (described later). Whether or not the chance zone rendering execution decision has been made may be determined based on whether or not it has already been stored. If it is determined that the chance zone effect execution has been determined (step S9012: YES), the chance zone effect determination process is ended.

  If it is determined that the chance zone effect execution has not been determined (step S9012; NO), the effect control CPU 120 stores a plurality of chance zone effect execution presence / absence decision tables (non-specific pattern (missing) chances) stored in the ROM 121. A zone effect execution presence / absence decision table, a chance zone effect execution presence / absence decision table for a specific pattern (loss), a chance zone effect execution presence / absence decision table for a nonspecific pattern (big hit), a chance zone effect execution presence or absence for a specific pattern (big hit) From the decision table), the chance zone effect execution presence / absence decision table according to the variation category command (non-specific pattern (loss), specific pattern (loss), non-specific pattern (big hit), specific pattern (big hit)) Select and set (Step S 013).

  FIG. 36 (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the determination ratio of the presence or absence of the execution of the chance zone effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 36 (B), execution non-execution presence of chance zone presentation is determined based on the change category command. That is, when it is a non-specific pattern (loss), non-execution is determined at a rate of 100%. When it is a specific pattern (loss), non-execution is determined at a rate of 95% and execution is determined at a rate of 5%. When it is a non-specific pattern (big hit), non-execution is determined at a rate of 100%. When it is a specific pattern (big hit), non-execution is determined at a rate of 80% and execution is determined at a rate of 20%.

  In each chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table, “execution nothing” and “execution yes” are determined so that “execution nothing” and “execution yes” are determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 36 (B). Each of them is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether to execute the chance zone effect execution. For example, in the chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table for non-specific patterns (loss), “execution nothing” is determined at a ratio of 100%, “off execution” and “execution yes”, respectively, chances A numerical value to be compared with a random value for determining presence / absence of zone effect execution is assigned. In the chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table for a specific pattern (loss), "execution non" is determined at a ratio of 95%, and "execution non" is determined at a ratio of 5%, "execution non" A numerical value to be compared with a random number value for determining presence / absence of execution of the chance zone effect is assigned to each of “Yes” and “Yes”. In the chance zone effect execution presence / absence decision table for non-specific pattern (big hit), the chance zone effect is provided for each of “execution nothing” and “execution yes” so that “execution nothing” is determined at a rate of 100%. A numerical value to be compared with a random value for determining whether to execute is assigned. In the chance zone effect execution presence / absence decision table for a specific pattern (big hit), "execution non" is determined so that "execution non" is determined at a ratio of 20%, "execution non" A numerical value to be compared with a random number value for determining presence / absence of execution of the chance zone effect is assigned to each of “Yes” and “Yes”. Note that the random number value for the chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination may be updated, for example, in the effect random number updating process (step S77).

  Subsequent to the process of step S9013, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the chance zone effect execution based on the random number value for determining the presence or absence of the chance zone effect execution (step S9014). That is, CPU 120 for production control, numerical value data which shows the random number value for the chance zone production execution existence decision, with the decision value of execution non existence or the execution presence in the chance zone production execution presence / absence decision table which is set in step S9013 To determine the presence or absence of execution of the chance zone effect. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the chance zone effect, the buffer for the first start winning reception command buffer 194A (or the second start winning reception command buffer 194B) for storing hold information for the current winning is stored. Information indicating that it is the target of the chance zone effect is stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C (or the second prefetch notice buffer 194D) corresponding to the number. Then, the chance zone effect determination process is ended.

  In the chance zone effect determination process shown in FIG. 36, when the third or fourth win is not made (step S9010; NO), chance zone effect is not executed, but the third or fourth win is achieved. Even when it is not the eyes, chance zone rendition may be performed. For example, when it is the first winning, the chance zone effect may be started from the change of the target which is the next change. In addition, when there is no prize during the change of the target, the chance zone effect may be ended at the end of the change of the target. In addition, when there is a prize during the fluctuation of the target, the chance to finish the fluctuation corresponding to the prize unconditionally (or limited to the case where the big hit expectation of the fluctuation corresponding to the prize is high) Zone presentation may be continued, or chance zone presentation may be ended at the end of target variation, as in the case where there is no prize in the variation of the target.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 37, first, the effect control CPU 120 reads, for example, the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main substrate 11 to see if it is a "loss" or not. It is determined (step S522). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 is a first variable display result notification command for notifying that the variable display result is “lost” in the variable display result notification command received in the variable display start waiting process of step S170. If there is, it is determined that it is a "loss". On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variable display result notification command received in the variable display start waiting process in step S170 is the second variable display result notification command notifying that the variable display result is the 16R probability variation big hit. If the result is a third variable display result notification command that notifies that the result is an 8R probability variation big hit, it is determined that it is not a "loss".

  When it is determined in step S522 that it is “lost” (step S522; YES), the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, a fluctuation designated by reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 or the like. The pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (that is, "PA1-1", "PA2-1", "PA2-2" in FIG. 5) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach (loss)". It is determined whether or not (step S523).

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is the non-reach fluctuation pattern (step S523; YES), the CPU 120 for effect control determines the combination of the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) constituting the non-reach combination (step S524) ). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a left determined symbol determination random number value updated by a random counter or the like provided in effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like. By referring to the predetermined left fixed symbol determination table or the like, the left fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 in the fixed decorative symbols is determined.

  Next, numerical data representing a random number for determining a right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like By referring to and the like, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, numerical value data indicating a random number value for determining the middle fixed symbol which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. The determined fixed decoration symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 among the fixed decoration symbols is determined by referring to the symbol etc. In addition, in the process of step S524, in response to the case where the variation symbol advance is being executed, the determined decoration symbol of the non-reach combination to be the predetermined chance symbol may be determined.

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is not the non-reach variation pattern (step S523; NO), the CPU 120 for effect control determines the combination of the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that constitutes the reach combination (step S525) . As an example, in the process of step S525, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining left and right fixed symbols, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in effect control counter setting unit 193, is extracted and stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like. By referring to the predetermined left and right fixed symbol determination table, etc., the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 in the fixed decorative symbol are aligned and stopped and displayed. The symbol number determines the same decorative symbol. Furthermore, numerical data representing a random value for determining the middle fixed symbol determined to be updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like By referring to the determined decoration pattern, the determined decoration pattern to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration pattern display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

  In addition, for example, when the symbol number of the middle fixed decoration symbol becomes the same as the symbol number of the left fixed decoration symbol and the right fixed decoration symbol, if the fixed decoration symbol becomes a big hit combination, an arbitrary value ( For example, by adding or subtracting “1”) to or from the symbol number of the middle fixed decoration symbol, the fixed decoration symbol may be a reach combination without being a big hit combination. Alternatively, when the middle fixed decoration pattern is determined, the difference between the left fixed decoration pattern and the right fixed decoration pattern with the pattern number (pattern difference) may be determined, and the middle fixed decoration pattern corresponding to the design difference may be set. .

  If it is determined in step S522 that "losing" is not made (step S522; NO), that is, if "big hit (16R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit)", the effect control CPU 120 determines the big hit combination A combination of symbols (final stop symbols) is determined (step S528). As an example, in the process of step S528, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a big hit determined to be updated by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like is extracted and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined big hit finalized symbol determination table, etc., it will be displayed in stop on the left, middle and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the screen of the image display 5 Decide on a decorative pattern with the same symbol number.

  In addition, when determining the combination of the finalized decorative symbol in step S528, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final ornament according to the type of the big hit (16R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit), presence or absence of the promotion effect, etc. The symbol may be determined.

  As a specific example, for example, a big hit combination for exclusive use of 16R positive variation big hit (for example, one in which three identical decorative designs are arranged side by side) and a big hit combination exclusively for 8R positive variation big hit (for example, the same same ornament design even number In the embodiment in which 3 pieces are arranged side by side, in the case of 16R probability variation big hit, it is sufficient to decide either the 16R probability variation big hit dedicated combination or the 8R probability variation big hit combination specifically as the determined decoration pattern . At this time, when a big hit combination dedicated to 8R certainty big hit is determined as a finalized decorative symbol, it is sufficient to be notified that it is a 16R true variable big hit between the end of eight rounds as a promotion effect. On the other hand, in the case of the 8R probability variation big hit, it may be decided to determine the 8R probability variation big hit dedicated combination or a big hit combination as the decoration symbol.

  In the present embodiment, 2R probability variation big hit (probability) is not provided, but when 2R probability variation big hit (probability) is provided, a combination of finalized design symbols (final stop design) corresponding to 2R probability variation big hit (probability) You may decide.

  After executing any of the processes of step S524, step S525, and step S528, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the change is the change of the chance zone (step S529A) . For example, the effect control CPU 120 already stores information indicating that it is the target of the chance zone effect, in association with any buffer number of the first read advance notice buffer 194C (or the second read advance notice buffer 194D) It may be determined whether or not the change is a change in the chance zone based on whether or not it is present.

  If it is determined in step S529A that the change is a change in the chance zone (step S529A; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect as a use pattern (step S529B) . That is, when it is determined to execute the chance zone effect in the chance zone effect determination process (FIG. 36) to be executed at the time of winning and information indicating that it is a target is stored (step S9014) In the variable display start setting process, an effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect is set as a use pattern. As a result, when the chance zone effect is performed at the time of winning, the chance zone effect is started from the next change (the change which is first started after the winning).

  If it is determined in step S529A that the change is not a change in the chance zone (step S529A; NO) or after the process of step S529B is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes a step-up notice effect determination process (step S530A). In the step-up advance presentation effect determination process, the presence or absence of execution of the step-up advance presentation effect (one aspect of the main advance presentation effect) is determined, and the step-up advance presentation effect pattern is determined when it is determined to execute the step-up advance presentation effect.

  FIG. 38 is an explanatory view for explaining the determination ratio etc. of the presence or absence of execution of the main notice effect (step-up notice effect, group notice effect, etc.). FIG. 38A shows an example of the determination ratio of the presence or absence of the execution of the step-up notice effect. In FIG. 38A (also in FIGS. 38B and 38C), the variation pattern “PA2-X” represents variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-2”, and variation patterns “PA3-X” Represents fluctuation patterns “PA3-1” to “PA3-2”, fluctuation pattern “PA4-X” represents fluctuation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-3”, and fluctuation pattern “PA5-X” Represents fluctuation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-3”, fluctuation pattern “PB3-X” represents fluctuation patterns “PB3-1” to “PB3-2”, and fluctuation patterns “PB4-X” Represents fluctuation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-3”, and fluctuation pattern “PB5-X” represents fluctuation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-3”.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 38A, execution non-execution / presence of the step-up notice effect is determined based on the variation pattern. That is, in the case of the fluctuation pattern "PA1-1" or "PB1-1", non-execution is determined at a rate of 100%. In the case of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-X”, the non-execution is determined at a rate of 95%, and the execution is determined at a rate of 5%.

  When it is the fluctuation pattern "PA3-X" or when it is the fluctuation pattern "PB3-X" or when it is the fluctuation pattern "PA4-X" or "PA5-X", the fluctuation pattern "PB4-X" or Since the case of “PB5-X” is also as shown in FIG. 38A, the description will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 38A, when determining whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect, for example, the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern "PA1-1" or "PB1-1", "PA2-X", "PA3- Several types of step-up notice effect execution presence / absence decision tables according to X "," PB3-X "," PA4-X "or" PA5-X "," PB4-X "or" PB5-X " It is stored in the ROM 121.

  In each of the above-described step-up advance notice effect execution presence / absence determination tables, “execution absence” and “execution presence” are determined so that “execution nothing” and “execution yes” are determined in the ratio of FIG. 38 (A). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining presence / absence of execution of step-up advance announcement effect execution may be assigned to each of the above. For example, in the step-up notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for the fluctuation pattern “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, “execution nothing” and “execution nothing” and “execution nothing” are determined. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining presence / absence of execution of step-up advance announcement effect execution may be allocated to each of “execution present”. Further, for example, in the step-up advance notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for the fluctuation pattern “PA2-X”, “execution non” is determined at a rate of 95% and “execution yes” is determined at a rate of 5% A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute step-up advance presentation effect execution may be assigned to each of “execution not performed” and “execution present”. Note that the random number value for determining the presence or absence of execution of the step-up notice effect may be updated, for example, in the effect random number updating process (step S77).

  FIG. 38B shows an example of the determination ratio of the step-up notice effect pattern. In FIG. 38 (B), the step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-1 (SU1)" is a step-up notice effect pattern for executing the step-up notice effect (SU1). Step-up notice effect (SU1) is an effect that causes a frame image G11 (FIG. 29D) to be displayed as the first step in the display area of the image display device 5. The step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-2 (SU2)” is a step-up notice effect pattern for executing the step-up notice effect (SU2). Step-up notice effect (SU2) is an effect that causes a frame image G12 (FIG. 29D) to be displayed as a second step following the first step in the display area of the image display device 5. The step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-3 (SU3)” is a step-up notice effect pattern for executing the step-up notice effect (SU3). Step-up notice effect (SU3) is an effect of displaying a frame image G13 (FIG. 29D) as a third step following the first step and the second step in the display area of the image display device 5. The step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-4 (SU4)” is a step-up notice effect pattern for executing the step-up notice effect (SU4). The step-up notice effect (SU4) is an effect that causes the frame image G14 (FIG. 29D) to be displayed as the fourth step following the first step, the second step, and the third step in the display area of the image display device 5. is there. The step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-5 (SU5)” is a step-up notice effect pattern for executing the step-up notice effect (SU5). The step-up notice effect (SU5) is a fifth step following the first step, the second step, the third step, and the fourth step in the display area of the image display device 5 as the frame image G15 (FIG. 29D). It is an effect to be displayed.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 38B, the variation pattern (variation pattern "PA2-X", "PA3-X", "PB3-X", "PA4-X" or "PA5-X", "PB4-X" Or “PB5-X”, the step-up notice effect pattern is determined. That is, in the case of the variation pattern "PA2-X", the step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-1 (SU1)" is determined at a rate of 85%, and the step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-2 (SU2)" is It is determined at a rate of 15%. When the variation pattern is "PA3-X", the step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-1 (SU1)" is determined at a rate of 40%, and the step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-2 (SU2)" is 30%. Step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-3 (SU3)" is determined at a rate of 20%, and step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-4 (SU4)" is determined at a rate of 10% .

  The variation pattern “PB3-X”, the variation pattern “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, and the variation pattern “PB4-X” or “PB5-X” are also shown in FIG. Since it is as it is, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 38B, in the case of determining the step-up notice effect pattern, for example, the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, “PA2-X”, “PA3-X” , “PB3-X”, “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, “PB4-X” or “PB5-X” (aside), store multiple types of step-up notice effect pattern determination tables in ROM 121 Do.

  In each step-up notice effect pattern determination table described above, each step-up notice effect pattern is determined so that each step-up notice effect pattern is determined at the rate shown in FIG. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for pattern determination may be assigned. For example, in the step-up notice effect pattern determination table for the fluctuation pattern "PA2-X", the step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-1 (SU1)" is determined at a ratio of 85%, and the step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1 Numerical value (decision value) to be compared with random value (not shown) for step-up notice effect pattern determination in each step-up notice effect pattern so that “-2 (SU2)” is determined at a rate of 15% Should be assigned. Further, for example, in the step-up notice effect pattern determination table for the fluctuation pattern "PA3-X", the step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-1 (SU1)" is determined at a ratio of 40%, and the step-up notice effect pattern " "SYP1-2 (SU2)" is determined at a rate of 30%, and the step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-3 (SU3)" is determined at a rate of 20%, and a step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-4 (SU4)" Each of the step-up notice effect patterns is assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the step-up notice effect pattern so that “10%” is determined. Just do it. Note that the random number value for determining the step-up notice effect pattern may be updated, for example, in the effect random number updating process (step S77).

  That is, in the step-up notice effect determination process (step S530A) of the variable display start setting process (step S171) shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 120 first responds to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command. Set up (select) the step-up advance notice execution execution presence / absence decision table, numerical data indicating the random number value for the step-up advance announcement execution execution presence / absence decision, and "execution nothing" or "execution" in the set step-up notice presentation execution presence / absence decision table The presence or absence of the execution of the step-up notice effect is determined by comparing the judgment value of “presence” or the like. Then, when it is determined that the step-up notice effect is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 sets (selects) the step-up notice effect pattern determination table according to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, and steps up. One step-up notice effect pattern is obtained by comparing, for example, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the notice effect pattern with the determination value of each step-up notice effect pattern in the set-up step-up notice effect pattern determination table. decide.

  After the step-up notice effect determination process of step S530A is performed, a group notice effect determination process is performed (step S530B). In the group advance presentation effect determination process, the presence or absence of execution of the group announcement presentation effect (one mode of the main announcement presentation effect) is determined.

  FIG. 38 (C) is an example of the determination ratio of the presence or absence of execution of the group preview effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 38 (C), execution non-execution / execution presence of group preview effect is determined based on the variation pattern. Specifically, the variation pattern “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, the variation pattern “PA2-X”, the variation pattern “PA3-X”, or When it is PB3-X ", the non-execution is determined at a rate of 100%. When the variation pattern is "PA4-X" or "PA5-X", the non-execution is determined at a rate of 95%, and the execution is determined at a rate of 5%. When the variation pattern is "PB4-X" or "PB5-X", the non-execution is determined at a rate of 80%, and the execution is determined at a rate of 20%.

  As shown in FIG. 38C, in the case of determining whether or not to execute the group preview effect, for example, the variation pattern (variation pattern “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, “PA2-X”, “PA3-X , “PB3-X”, “PA4-X”, or “PA5-X”, “PB4-X” or “PB5-X” (aside from a plurality of group notice effect execution presence / absence decision tables in the ROM 121) Remember.

  In each of the above-mentioned group advance presentation effect execution presence / absence decision tables, “execution absence” and “execution presence” are determined so that “execution nothing” and “execution yes” are determined in the ratio of FIG. 38 (C). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining presence / absence of execution of group preview effect execution may be assigned to each of the above. For example, in the group advance presentation effect execution presence / absence determination table for the fluctuation pattern "PA1-1" or "PB1-1", "execution not performed" and "execution not performed" are determined so as to be determined at a rate of 100%. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining presence / absence of execution of group preview effect execution may be assigned to each of “presence”. Also, for example, in the group preliminary rendering execution execution presence / absence decision table for the fluctuation pattern "PA4-X" or "PA5-X", "execution non" is determined at a rate of 95%, and "execution yes" at a rate of 5% As determined in the above, it is only necessary to assign a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining presence / absence of execution of group advance rendering to each of "execution non" and "execution present" . Note that the random number value for determining the presence / absence of group notice effect execution may be, for example, updated in the effect random number updating process (step S77).

  That is, in the group preview effect determination process (step S530B) of the variable display start setting process (step S171) shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 120 first performs the group according to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command. Set (select) the advance notice execution execution presence / absence decision table, and numerical data indicating a random number value for group notice announcement execution presence / absence determination The presence or absence of the execution of the group preview effect is determined by comparing the value and the like.

  After executing the group advance notice effect determination process of step S530B, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reserve digest process (step S531). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 executes (starts) operation control to shift the hold display in the sixth layer (Z value = 5) from the upper rank. More specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation of the decorative symbol in conjunction with the first special figure game (when the variable display of the current decorative symbol is in conjunction with the first special figure game) ), The hold display after shift and the active display based on the hold etc. effect pattern (that is, the content stored in step S160B) determined in the hold etc. effect determination process (step S160A) of the prize effect determination process (step S150) In addition to setting the effect control pattern corresponding to the display mode as the usage pattern, transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. included in the set effect control pattern, etc. Display mode of the hold display or the active display after the shift determined in the hold etc. effect determination processing Corresponding hold such as a display image (FIG. 27 (A), FIG. 27 (B), FIG. 29 (A)) to display a. The same applies to the case where the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game (when the variable display of the current decorative symbol is in conjunction with the second special figure game).

  After executing the reserve processing in step S531, the CPU for effect control 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation or the like as a usage pattern (step S532). That is, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 as the usage pattern. Thereby, for example, when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern of the super reach β, the effect control pattern including the movable combination control data for operating the movable combination 17 is set as the usage pattern . When it is determined to execute the step-up notice effect in the step-up notice effect determining process (step S530A), the effect control pattern corresponding to the determined step-up notice effect pattern is set as a use pattern. When it is determined in the group advance presentation effect determination process (step S530B) that the group announcement effect is to be executed, an effect control pattern corresponding to the group announcement effect is set as the usage pattern.

  After executing the processing of step S532, the CPU for effect control 120 sets the initial value of the effect control process timer of the process data of the effect control pattern set in step S532 (step S534), and starts the effect control process timer. Then (step S535), the rendering device such as the image display device 5 is controlled in accordance with the contents of the process data (step S536).

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (the special figure fluctuation time shown in FIG. 5) specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command in the fluctuation time timer (step S537).

  After executing the processing of step S537, the effect control CPU 120 digests the command stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A or the second start winning reception command buffer 194B (step S538). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 is the smallest of the commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the first special view game. The command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number (buffer number "1") is deleted, and in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A, a buffer number larger than the buffer number of the command to be deleted Each command stored in the corresponding area is shifted while maintaining the winning order. In addition, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special view game, the effect control CPU 120 starts the smallest buffer number among the commands stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B ( An area corresponding to a buffer number larger than the buffer number of the command to be deleted is deleted in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B while the command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "1" is deleted. The respective commands stored in are shifted while maintaining the winning order. Further, in the process of step S538, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the deletion or shift of the command by the information stored in the first read preview buffer 194C or the second read report buffer 194D provided in the RAM 122 or the like. Deletions and shifts are also performed. Further, in the process of step S538, the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores a command to be deleted (a symbol designation command of the variation, a variation category command, and the like) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

  Following the process of step S538, the CPU for effect control 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S539), and ends the variable display start setting process. .

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect process (step S172). FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the chance zone effect operation control process and the like. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of group notice effect operation control processing and the like. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect execution notification operation control process.

  In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 39, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the change time timer value (step S540), and determines whether the change time timer value has become 0 (step S541). ). That is, it is determined whether the fluctuation time timer has timed out. When the fluctuation time timer value becomes 0 (step S541; YES), the CPU for effect control 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process for special drawing (step S548). ), The variable display effect processing ends.

  When the fluctuation time timer value is not 0 (step S 541: NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes operation control such as variable display of the decorative symbol in the tenth layer (Z value = 9) from the upper rank ( Start, continue) (step S 542). Specifically, the CPU for effect control 120 displays the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set as the usage pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). By transmitting to the VDP of the display control unit 123 or the like, an image including a decorative pattern or the like corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed.

  After the process of step S542, the chance zone effect operation control process is performed (step S543).

  FIG. 40 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the chance zone effect operation control process (step S543). In the chance zone effect operation control process shown in FIG. 40A, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the change is a change in the chance zone (step S9020). For example, the effect control CPU 120 already stores information indicating that it is the target of the chance zone effect, in association with any buffer number of the first read advance notice buffer 194C (or the second read advance notice buffer 194D) It may be determined whether or not the change is a change in the chance zone based on whether or not it is present. If it is determined that the change is not a change in the chance zone (step S9020; NO), the chance zone rendering operation control process is ended.

  If it is determined that the change is a change in the chance zone (step S9020; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the operation control of the chance zone effect in the eighth layer (Z value = 7) from the top ( Start, continue) (step S9021). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 is a display control command designated by the display control data, included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect set as the usage pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). Are transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc., to display a chance zone effect image (see FIG. 27A, FIG. 27B, and FIG. 29C) corresponding to the chance zone effect. .

  When it is determined that chance zone effect is to be performed in the determination (step S9014) of the presence or absence of the chance zone effect execution of the chance zone effect determination process (see FIG. 36A), the number of pending storages Set the chance zone continuation counter according to whether or not (for example, the count value “1” for the first hold, for example, the count value “2” for the second hold, for example For example, the count value "3" may be set when the unit is the fourth, and the count value "4" may be set when the unit is the fourth for example, and the chance zone continuation counter may be decremented by one every shift. The chance zone continuation counter may be provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193.

  As described above, when using the chance zone continuation counter, in the process of step S9020, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the change is a change of the chance zone based on the value of the chance zone continuation counter. You may

  After the chance zone effect operation control process of step S543 is performed, a step-up notice effect operation control process is performed (step S544).

  FIG. 40 (B) is a flowchart showing an example of the step-up notice effect operation control process (step S544). In the step-up notice effect operation control process shown in FIG. 40 (B), the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether it is a step-up notice effect period (period in which a step-up notice effect is to be executed) (step S9030). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the effect control pattern corresponding to the step-up notice effect pattern is already set as the use pattern, or when the effect control pattern is already set as the use pattern (the contents set (execution Whether or not it is a step-up notice effect period may be determined based on the timing etc.) and the value of the effect control process timer. If it is determined that it is not in the step-up advance notice effect period (step S9030; NO), the step-up notice effect operation control process ends.

  If it is determined that the step-up notice effect period is over (step S9030; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes operation control of the step-up notice effect in the ninth layer (Z value = 8) from the top (start , And continue) (step S9031). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display control data specified in the effect control pattern corresponding to the step-up notice effect pattern set as the usage pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). Step-up notice effect images corresponding to the step-up notice effects (SU1 to SU5) by transmitting the control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123 or the like (FIG. 27 (A), FIG. 27 (B), FIG. Display 29 (D)).

  After executing the processing of step S9031, the CPU for effect control 120 determines whether or not the SU5 execution flag indicating that the step-up notice effect (SU5) is executed is in the on state (step S9032). The SU5 execution flag may be provided to the effect control flag setting unit 191. If the SU5 execution flag is in the on state (step S9032; YES), the step-up notice effect operation control process ends.

  When the SU5 execution flag is not in the on state (step S9032; NO), the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the step-up notice effect (SU5) is executed (step S9033). For example, in the variable display start setting process (step S171), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the effect control pattern corresponding to the step-up notice effect pattern is set as the use pattern or when the effect control pattern is set as the use pattern. Whether or not the step-up advance notice effect (SU5) is executed may be determined based on the set contents (execution timing of SU5, etc.) and the value of the effect control process timer. When the step-up notice effect (SU5) is not executed (step S9033; NO), the step-up notice effect operation control process is ended. If the step-up notice effect (SU5) is executed (step S9033; YES), the SU5 execution flag is set to the on state (step S9034), and the step-up notice effect operation control process ends.

  After performing the step-up notice effect operation control process of step S544, a group notice effect operation control process is performed (step S545).

  FIG. 41 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the group announcement effect operation control process (step S545). In the group notice effect operation control process shown in FIG. 41 (A), the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether it is a group notice effect period (period in which a group notice effect is to be performed) (step S9040). For example, in the variable display start setting process (step S171), the effect control CPU 120 sets whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the group notice effect is set as the use pattern, or when the effect control pattern is set as the use pattern. It may be determined whether or not it is a group advance presentation period based on the content being executed (execution timing of group announcement effect, etc.) and the value of the presentation control process timer. If it is determined that it is not in the group preview effect period (step S9040; NO), the group preview effect operation control process is ended.

  When it is determined that it is the group advance presentation period (step S9040; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the operation control of the group announcement attraction in the seventh layer (Z value = 6) from the top (start, continue) ) (Step S9041). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 is a display control command designated by the display control data, included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the group advance effect set as the usage pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). Is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123 or the like to display a group notice effect image (see FIG. 27A, FIG. 27B, and FIG. 29B) corresponding to the group notice effect. .

  After executing the processing of step S9041, the CPU for effect control 120 determines whether or not the group preview effect execution flag indicating that the group preview effect has been executed is in the on state (step S9042). The group advance effect execution flag may be provided to the effect control flag setting unit 191. If the group advance effect execution flag is on (step S9042: YES), the group advance effect operation control process is ended.

  When the group advance effect execution flag is not in the on state (step S9042; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the group advance effect execution flag in the on state (step S9043), and ends the group advance effect operation control process.

  After the group advance presentation operation control process of step S545 is performed, a bonus game operation control process is performed (step S546).

  FIG. 41 (B) is a flowchart showing an example of the bonus game action control process (step S546). In the bonus game action control process shown in FIG. 41 (B), the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether it is a bonus article operation period (period for operating the movable prize 17) (step S9050). For example, in the variable display start setting process (step S171), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern of super reach β) accompanied by the operation of the movable object 17 as the usage pattern If it is set as the usage pattern or not, whether or not it is a group advance presentation period based on the set contents (the operation timing of the movable part 17 etc.) and the value of the presentation control process timer You may judge. If it is determined that it is not the bonus feature operation period (step S9050; NO), the bonus feature operation control process is ended.

  If it is determined that it is a combination feature operation period (step S9050; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes operation control of the movable combination 17 (step S9051). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets the movable combination included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern of super reach β) set as the usage pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). The mobile part 17 is operated by transmitting a control command specified by the object control data to the object control board 16 or the like.

  Following the process of step S9051, the effect control CPU 120 executes (starts, continues) operation control of the bonus effect effect in the fifth layer from the top (Z value = 4) (step S9052). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control pattern (feature effect effect) corresponding to the variation pattern (variation pattern of super reach β) set as the usage pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37). A bonus effect effect image corresponding to a bonus effect effect by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data, which is included in the display control data to be executed, to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. (See FIG. 27 (A), FIG. 27 (B), and FIG. 28 (C)).

  After executing the process of step S9052, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the combination effect execution flag indicating that the operation control of the combination is performed is in the on state (step S9053). The feature effect execution flag may be provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. If the feature effect execution flag is in the on state (step S9053; YES), the feature operation control process ends.

  When the combination effect execution flag is not on (step S9053; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the combination effect execution flag on (step S9054), and ends the combination operation control process.

  After executing the bonus game action control process of step S546, the effect execution informing operation control process is executed (step S547).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect execution notification operation control process (step S547). In the effect execution notification operation control process shown in FIG. 42, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether it is a notification period of notification of execution of step-up advance effect (SU5) (step S9060). For example, the CPU for effect control 120 is set whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the notification of the execution of the step-up notice effect (SU5) is already set as the use pattern, or when it is already set as the use pattern It may be determined whether or not it is a notification period of execution notification of step-up advance presentation effect (SU5) based on the content (timing of notification etc.) and the value of the effect control process timer.

  If it is determined that it is not the notification period of the notification of the execution of the step-up notice effect (SU5) (step S9060; NO), the CPU for effect control 120 executes the SU5 execution flag indicating that the step-up notice effect (SU5) is executed. Is checked (step S9061). If the SU5 execution flag is in the on state (step S9061; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the SU5 execution flag to the off state (step S9062).

  If it is determined that it is the notification period of the execution notification of SU5 (step S9060; YES) or after the processing of step S9062 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines the number of notifications and the layer according to the notification start order (Z value = The operation control of the execution notification of SU 5 is executed (started and continued) in 1-3) (step S9063). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the SU 5 as a usage pattern, and displays the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern. By performing transmission to the VDP of the control unit 123 or the like, an effect execution notification image corresponding to the execution notification of SU 5 (FIG. 27A, FIG. 27B, FIG. 28B, FIG. 28D) 28 (E) and 28 (F) are displayed.

  If the SU5 execution flag is not in the on state (step S9061; NO) or after the process of step S9063 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a notification period of execution notification of group advance effect ( Step S9064). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the group advance effect is already set as the use pattern, or the contents which are set when the use pattern is already set ( It may be determined whether or not it is a notification period of the execution notification of the group preview effect based on the notification timing and the like) and the value of the effect control process timer.

  When it is determined that it is not a notification period of execution notification of group notice effect (step S9064; NO), CPU 120 for effect control indicates that the group notice effect execution flag indicating that group notice effect is executed is in the on state. It is determined (step S9065). If the group advance effect execution flag is in the on state (step S9065; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the group advance effect execution flag to the off state (step S9066).

  When it is determined that it is a notification period of execution notification of group advance effect (step S9064; YES) or after the processing of step S9066 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines the number of notification, a layer according to the notification start order (Z The operation control of the execution notification of the group advance presentation effect is executed (started, continued) with the value = 1 to 3) (step S9067). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets, as a use pattern, an effect control pattern corresponding to notification of execution of group advance effect, and a display control command specified by display control data, which is included in the effect control pattern set. Are transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc., so that an effect notification image corresponding to notification of execution of group advance effect (FIG. 27A, FIG. 27B, FIG. 28B, and FIG. 28 (D), FIG. 28 (E), and FIG. 28 (F) are displayed.

  If the group advance effect execution flag is not in the on state (step S9065; NO), or after the process of step S9067 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a notification period of execution notification of feature effect (Step S9068). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the effect control pattern corresponding to the notification of the execution of the character effect is already set as the use pattern, or the content that is set when the use pattern is already set ( It may be determined whether or not it is a notification period of execution notification of the effect presentation based on the notification timing and the like) and the value of the effect control process timer.

  When it is determined that the notification period of the execution notification of the prize effect is not (step S9068; NO), the CPU for effect control 120 determines whether the prize effect execution flag is in the on state (step S9069). If the combination effect execution flag is not in the on state (step S9069; NO), the effect execution notification operation control process is ended. If the combination effect execution flag is in the on state (step S9069; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the combination effect execution flag to the off state (step S9070).

  If it is determined that the notification period of the execution notification of the effect is a part (step S9068; YES), or after the processing of step S9070 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines the number of notifications and a layer according to the notification start order (Z Operation control (execution, continuation) of notification of execution of a character item effect is executed with values = 1 to 3) (step S9071). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to an execution notification of a feature effect as a use pattern, and a display control command specified by display control data included in the effect control pattern set. Are transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc., to produce an execution notification image (FIG. 27 (A), FIG. 27 (B), FIG. 28 (B), FIG. 28 (D), FIG. 28 (E), and FIG. 28 (F) are displayed. Then, the effect execution notification operation control process ends.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart of an example of the special figure-per-wait process (step S173). In special processing per special drawing shown in FIG. 43, the CPU for effect control 120 first determines whether or not a symbol determination designation command has been received (step S720). When it is determined that the symbol determination designating command has not been received (step S720; NO), the special figure-per-wait process is ended.

  When it is determined that the symbol determination designating command is received (step S720; YES), the effect control CPU 120 stops and displays the finalized decorative symbol (step S722). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the determined decoration symbol is a big hit symbol (step S723). If the determined decoration symbol is not a big hit symbol (step S723: NO), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “0” which is a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S726). End special processing per wait processing.

  If the determined decoration symbol is a big hit symbol (step S723: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether a hit start designation command has been received (step S730). When it is determined that the hit start designation command has not been received (step S730; NO), the special figure hit waiting process is ended.

  When it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received (step S730; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets fanfare effect (step S733), and the value of the effect process flag corresponds to the big hit start process , And is updated to "4" (step S734), and the processing for waiting for a special figure ends.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the display area of the image display device 5. FIG. 44A to FIG. 44E show display operations arranged in time series. In FIG. 44 (A) and the like, the arrow “↓” shown in the display area of the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing.

  FIG. 44 (A) shows the final stop symbol (left symbol "4", middle symbol "1", right symbol "6") in the variable display corresponding to the hold display M0 (not shown) immediately before the hold display M1. Represents a scene in which the display is stopped. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 44 (A), an image (Z value = 9) of a decorative symbol including the final stop symbol, and the first hold display image G5 (hold display M1, M2, M3) And a pending display image (Z value = 5).

  The image of the decorative pattern is set as a use control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern etc. in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37) as a use pattern, and in the effect control pattern in the variable display effect process (see FIG. 39) A display control command specified by the included display control data is displayed by being transmitted to the display control unit 123 or the like. The display image for holding etc. is set as a use control pattern corresponding to the display mode of the holding display or the active display in the prize effect determination processing (see FIG. 33) and the variable display start setting processing (refer to FIG. 37). A display control command specified by display control data included in the set effect control pattern is displayed by being transmitted to the display control unit 123 or the like.

  In addition, it is assumed that the suspension display M3 is additionally displayed based on the first start winning combination generated during the variable display corresponding to the suspension display M0 (not shown) (step S162 of the winning effect determination process of FIG. 33). . In addition, it is assumed that the execution of the chance zone effect targeting the hold instruction M3 is determined in the chance zone effect determination process (step S161A) when the hold instruction M3 is additionally displayed (step of FIG. 36A) S9014).

  FIG. 44 (B) shows a scene in which variable display corresponding to the hold display M1 is being performed. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 44 (B), an image (Z value = 9) of a decorative symbol including the decorative symbol in variation and the first hold display image G5 (hold display M2, M3) A reserve display image (Z value = 5) including the and the active display image G7 (active display M1) and a chance zone effect image (Z value = 7) including the character image G9 and the pictogram image G10 There is.

  In the chance zone effect image, the effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect is set as a use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37), and in the chance zone effect operation control process (see FIG. 40A). The display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern is displayed by being transmitted to the display control unit 123 or the like.

  The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the hold indication M1 is assumed to be the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β) accompanied by the operation of the movable part 17. In addition, when the hold display M1 is digested, it is assumed that execution of the step-up notice effect (SU4) and execution of the group notice effect are determined in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37).

  FIG. 44 (C) shows a scene following FIG. 44 (B). In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 44 (C), an image (Z value = 9) of a decorative symbol including the decorative symbol in variation and the first hold display image G5 (hold display M2, M3) And the like display image (Z value = 5) including the and the active display image G7 (active display M1), the chance zone effect image (Z value = 7) including the character image G9 and the pictogram image G10, and the frame image G14 And a step-up notice effect image (Z value = 8) including. Although a character or the like is displayed as SU4 in the frame image G14 in FIG. 44C, it is not illustrated. The same applies to FIGS. 44 (D) to 44 (E).

  In the step-up notice effect image, the effect control pattern corresponding to the step-up notice effect pattern is set as a use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37), and the step-up notice effect operation control process (FIG. And the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern is transmitted to the display control unit 123 or the like.

  FIG. 44D shows a scene following FIG. 44C. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 44 (D), an image (Z value = 9) of a decorative symbol including the decorative symbol in variation and the first hold display image G5 (hold display M2, M3) And the like display image (Z value = 5) including the and the active display image G7 (active display M1), the chance zone effect image (Z value = 7) including the character image G9 and the pictogram image G10, and the frame image G14 Effect execution including the step-up notice effect image (Z value = 8) including the group notice effect image (Z value = 6) including the character image G8, and the effect execution including the pictogram image G3-1 corresponding to execution notification of the group notice effect A notification image (Z value = 3) is displayed.

  In the group announcement effect image, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the group announcement presentation is set as a usage pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37), and in the group announcement presentation operation control process (see FIG. 41A). The display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern is displayed by being transmitted to the display control unit 123 or the like. In the effect execution notification image corresponding to the execution notification of the group advance effect, the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the group advance effect is set as the usage pattern in the effect execution notification operation control (see FIG. 42), and the effect is set A display control command specified by display control data included in the control pattern is displayed by being transmitted to the display control unit 123 or the like.

  FIG. 44 (E) shows a scene following FIG. 44 (D). In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 44 (E), an image (Z value = 9) of a decorative symbol including the decorative symbol in variation and the first hold display image G5 (hold display M2, M3) And the like display image (Z value = 5) including the and the active display image G7 (active display M1), the chance zone effect image (Z value = 7) including the character image G9 and the pictogram image G10, and the frame image G14 Effect execution including the step-up notice effect image (Z value = 8) including the group notice effect image (Z value = 6) including the character image G8, and the effect execution including the pictogram image G3-1 corresponding to execution notification of the group notice effect Effect execution notification image (Z value (Z value = 3), effect effect image (Z value = 4) including effect image G 4, pictogram image G 3-2 corresponding to notification of execution of item effect (Z With the value 2) It is displayed. In FIG. 44 (E), the movable (moving) movable object 17 is not shown. The same applies to FIG.

  In the bonus effect effect image, in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37), the effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern of super reach β) is set as a usage pattern, and The display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern is displayed by transmission to the display control unit 123 or the like in 41 (see (B)). In the effect execution notification image corresponding to the execution notification of the artifact effect, the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the artifact effect is set as the usage pattern in the effect execution notification operation control (see FIG. 42) and the effect is set A display control command specified by display control data included in the control pattern is displayed by being transmitted to the display control unit 123 or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 44, an image with a small Z value is displayed on the front layer, and an image with a large Z value is displayed on the back layer.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the display area of the image display device 5. FIGS. 45A to 44F show display operations arranged in time series. In FIG. 45 (A) and the like, the arrow “↓” shown in the display area of the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing.

  FIG. 45 (A) shows the final stop symbol (left symbol "2", middle symbol "8", right symbol "8") in the variable display corresponding to the hold display M20 (not shown) immediately before the hold display M21. Represents a scene in which the display is stopped. The display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 45A includes an image (Z value = 9) of a decorative symbol including the final stop symbol and the first hold display image G5 (hold display M21, M22). The hold etc. display image (Z value = 5) is displayed.

  FIG. 45B shows a scene in which variable display corresponding to the hold display M21 is being performed. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 45 (B), an image (Z value = 9) of a decorative symbol including the decorative symbol in variation and a first hold display image G5 (hold display M22) are active. A reserve display image (Z value = 5) including the display image G7 (active display M21) is displayed.

  The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the hold indication M21 is assumed to be the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β) accompanied by the operation of the movable part 17. In addition, when the hold display M21 is digested, it is assumed that execution of the step-up notice effect (SU5) and execution of the group notice effect are determined in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 37).

  FIG. 45 (C) shows a scene following FIG. 45 (B). In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 45 (C), an image (Z value = 9) of a decorative symbol including the decorative symbol in variation and a first pending display image G5 (pending display M22) are active. A display image with hold etc. (Z value = 5) including the display image G7 (active display M21), a step-up notice effect image (Z value = 8) including the frame image G15, and a pictogram image corresponding to execution notification of SU5 An effect execution notification image (Z value = 3) including G3-1 is displayed. In FIG. 45C, although a character or the like is displayed as SU5 in the frame image G15, it is not shown. The same applies to FIGS. 45 (D) to 45 (F). Further, in FIG. 45 (C), in the area other than the frame image G15, although the decorative pattern in change is visible, it is not shown. The same applies to FIGS. 45 (D) to 45 (F).

  The effect execution notification image corresponding to the execution notification of SU5 is included in the effect control pattern set with the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of SU5 set as the usage pattern in the effect execution notification operation control (see FIG. 42). A display control instruction designated by the display control data to be displayed is displayed by being transmitted to the display control unit 123 or the like.

  FIG. 45 (D) shows a scene following FIG. 45 (C). In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 45 (D), an image (Z value = 9) of a decorative symbol including the decorative symbol in variation and a first hold display image G5 (hold display M22) are active. A display image with hold etc. (Z value = 5) including the display image G7 (active display M21), a step-up notice effect image (Z value = 8) including the frame image G15, and a pictogram image corresponding to execution notification of SU5 It includes a pictogram image G3-1 corresponding to an execution notification of a group notice effect, a presentation execution notification image (Z value = 3) including G3-1, a group notice effect image (Z value = 6) including a character image G8, and The effect execution notification image (Z value = 2) is displayed.

  FIG. 45 (E) shows a scene following FIG. 45 (D). In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 45 (E), an image (Z value = 9) of a decorative symbol including the decorative symbol in variation and the first pending display image G5 (pending display M22) are active. A display image with hold etc. (Z value = 5) including the display image G7 (active display M21), a step-up notice effect image (Z value = 8) including the frame image G15, and a pictogram image corresponding to execution notification of SU5 It includes a pictogram image G3-2 corresponding to an execution notification of a group announcement effect (Z value = 3) including a G3-1, a group announcement effect image (Z value = 6) including a character image G8, and an execution announcement of a group announcement effect. Effect execution notification image (Z value = 2), character effect effect effect image (Z value = 4) including effect image G4, and effect execution notification image including pictogram image G3-3 corresponding to notification of execution of character effect (Z value = 1 Bets are displayed.

  FIG. 45F shows a scene in which the magnetic abnormality has occurred in the state of FIG. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 45F, an error notification image (Z value = 0) including a pictogram image G1 and a character image G2 is displayed in addition to the screens of FIG. It is done.

  As shown in FIG. 44, an image with a small Z value is displayed on the front layer, and an image with a large Z value is displayed on the back layer.

  In addition, effects other than the effects described above can also be performed. For example, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect related to the opening of the normal variable winning prize ball device 6B.

  FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing an example of a predetermined effect process for executing a predetermined effect relating to the opening of the normally variable winning ball device 6B. The predetermined effect process shown in FIG. 46 is executed, for example, before the winning effect determination process of the effect control process process (see FIG. 32). In FIG. 46, the predetermined effect relating to the opening of the normally variable winning ball device 6B is simply referred to as the predetermined effect.

  In the predetermined effect processing shown in FIG. 46, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether a predetermined effect in-progress flag indicating that a predetermined effect is being executed is set (step S731). When the predetermined effect executing flag is set in step S731 (ie, when the predetermined effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 120 measures a predetermined effect timer for measuring an effect period of the predetermined effect. Is decremented by 1 (step S734), and it is determined whether the value of the predetermined effect timer has become 0 (step S735A). If the value of the predetermined effect timer is not 0 (step S735A; NO), the operation control of the predetermined effect (see FIG. 48A described later) is executed (continue) (step S735B), and the predetermined effect process is performed. Finish. If the value of the predetermined effect timer becomes 0 (step S735A; YES), the predetermined effect is ended (step S736), the predetermined effect in-progress flag is reset (step S737), and the predetermined effect process is ended.

  If the predetermined effect executing flag is not set in step S731 (step S731; NO), CPU 120 for effect control starts the normal symbol fluctuation start designation command (ordinary symbol fluctuation start designation (hit) command or the normal symbol fluctuation start Whether the normal symbol fluctuation start specification command reception flag (normal symbol fluctuation start specification (hit) command reception flag or the normal symbol fluctuation start specification (loss) command reception flag) indicating that the specification (loss) command has been received is set It is determined whether or not it is (step S751). If the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag is not set (step S751; NO), the predetermined effect processing is ended.

  If the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag is set (step S751; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the high base state based on the time saving flag. (Step S752). If the current gaming state is the high base state (step S752; YES), the predetermined effect processing is ended.

  If the current gaming state is not the high base state (step S752; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the big hit gaming state is present (step S753). Whether or not it is a jackpot gaming state may be determined by, for example, the value of the rendering process flag. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine that the jackpot gaming state is in effect when the value of the effect process flag is 4 or more. If it is in the jackpot gaming state (step S753; YES), the predetermined effect processing ends.

  If it is not the jackpot gaming state (step S753; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the decorative symbol is being changed (step S755). It may be determined, for example, by the value of the rendering process flag whether or not the decorative pattern is in motion. If the decorative symbol is not changing (step S755; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether one minute or more has elapsed since the ending of the decorative symbol change (step S757). For example, a timer may be prepared to measure the time after the end of the variation of the decorative design, and it may be determined whether one minute or more has elapsed based on the measurement value of the timer. If one minute or more has elapsed (step S757; YES), the predetermined effect process is ended. If one minute or more has not elapsed (step S757; NO), the process proceeds to step S759.

  It should be noted that to end the process when one minute or more has passed since the end of the variation of the decorative symbol, it is considered that the player continues the game for a while after the variation of the decorative symbol is finished. It is for. In addition, the above one minute is slightly more than the time (12 seconds x 4) based on the variation time of the normal symbol (12 seconds) in the low base state and the upper limit value 4 of the gate passing memory number (the number of normal symbol reservations) This is because it is considered better to execute the process of step S759 until the time (60 seconds) has elapsed.

  If the decorative symbol is changing (step S755; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined effect is to be executed, and the type (step S759).

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the presence / absence of the predetermined effect and the like. In the process of step S759, the CPU for effect control 120 determines, for example, whether or not to execute a predetermined effect at a rate as shown in FIG. That is, in the predetermined effect execution presence / absence determination table, determination values to be compared with random numbers (not shown) for determination of predetermined effect execution presence / absence etc. are allocated so as to be proportions as shown in FIG.

  In the process of step S759, CPU 120 for production control, when the normal symbol fluctuation start designated (hit) command reception flag is set, the predetermined effect execution presence (notification "x"), the predetermined effect execution presence (notification " Yes), predetermined effect execution present (notification "x" → "O"), predetermined effect execution presence or absence etc is determined so that the ratio of each without a predetermined effect execution becomes the ratio of "per normal symbol" in FIG. The judgment value to be compared with the random number (not shown) is the predetermined effect execution (notification "x"), the predetermined effect execution (notification "o"), the predetermined effect execution (notification "x" → "o"), By selecting a table assigned to each of the predetermined performance non-execution, and comparing the random number (not shown) for determination of presence / absence of predetermined performance execution etc. with the determination value, the predetermined performance execution present (notification “x”), There is a predetermined effect execution (notice "o"), a predetermined effect execution is (report It is sufficient to determine either knowledge “x” → “o”) or no predetermined effect execution. In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the normal symbol fluctuation start specified (lost) command reception flag is set, the predetermined effect execution presence (notification "x"), predetermined effect execution presence (notification "o"), Random numbers for determination of presence / absence of predetermined effect execution, etc. so that each ratio of predetermined effect execution present (notification “x” → “〇”) and predetermined effect non-execution becomes the proportion of “normal symbol loss” in FIG. 47 The judgment value to be compared with that shown) has a predetermined effect execution (notification “x”), a predetermined effect execution is present (notification “」 ”), a predetermined effect execution is present (notification“ x ”→“) ”), no predetermined effect execution By selecting a table assigned to each of the above and comparing a random number (not shown) for determining the presence or absence of predetermined effect execution etc. with the determination value, the predetermined effect execution present (notification “x”), the predetermined effect execution present (Notice "O"), predetermined effect execution Yes (notice "X" → "O"), place It may be determined either demonstration execution no. The predetermined effect execution (notification “x”) is to execute a predetermined effect for displaying “x”. The predetermined effect execution (notification “o”) is to execute a predetermined effect for displaying “o”. The predetermined effect execution (informing “x” → “o”) is to execute a predetermined effect that displays “o” after displaying “x”. The predetermined effect non-execution is not to execute the predetermined effect.

  In addition, when executing the process of step S759, the effect control CPU 120 resets the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag. Also, the effect control CPU 120 resets the set symbol transmission start designation command reception flag even when the processing in step S759 is not executed due to “YES” determination in steps S752, S753, and S755.

  Subsequent to the process of step S759, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the predetermined effect by the process of step S759 (step S764). If it is not determined to execute the predetermined effect (step S764; NO), the predetermined effect process is ended.

  If it is determined to execute the predetermined effect (step S 764; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the time corresponding to the determined predetermined effect pattern in the predetermined effect timer. (Step S778) A predetermined effect is started (Step S779). The process of steps S778 and S779 is a process of starting a predetermined effect timer and performing control of a rendering device such as the image display device 5 according to the contents of process data (process similar to steps S535 and S536 of FIG. 37). is there. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined effect executing flag (step S780), and ends the predetermined effect process.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory view for explaining the predetermined effect operation control process (see FIG. 46) and the like. Although it has been described that the Z value of the background (background image) is “10”, in FIG. 48, the Z value of the background is “11”.

  FIG. 48A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the predetermined effect operation control process (step S735B). In the predetermined effect operation control process shown in FIG. 48 (A), the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the decorative symbol is being variably displayed (step S9080). The effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not the decorative symbol is being variably displayed based on the value of the effect process flag and the received command. For example, when the effect process flag has a value of 1 or 2 or the effect process flag has a value of 3 and before the symbol determination designating command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative pattern in a variable display. When it is determined that the effect process flag has a value of 0, or when the effect process flag has a value of 3 and after the symbol determination designation command has been received, the decorative symbol is being displayed as a stop (the decorative symbol is displayed) It may be determined that variable display is not in progress.

  When it is determined that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed (step S9080; YES), the effect control CPU 120 is a layer (for example, Z value = 8) higher than the layer (Z value = 9) of the decorative symbol. The operation control of the predetermined effect is executed (started, continued) at step S9081. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 displays a display control command specified by the display control data, which is included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern set as the usage pattern in the predetermined effect process (see FIG. 46). A predetermined effect image (Z value = 8) corresponding to a predetermined effect is displayed by transmitting the information to the VDP of the control unit 123 or the like. Then, the predetermined effect operation control process is ended.

  If it is determined that the decorative symbol is not stop variable (step S9080; NO), the effect control CPU 120 is a layer (for example, Z value = 10) lower than the layer (Z value = 9) of the decorative symbol. Operation control of a predetermined effect is executed (started, continued) (step S9082). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 displays a display control command specified by the display control data, which is included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern set as the usage pattern in the predetermined effect process (see FIG. 46). A predetermined effect image (Z value = 10) corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed by transmitting the information to the VDP of the control unit 123 or the like. Then, the predetermined effect operation control process is ended.

  FIG. 48 (B) shows a predetermined effect image (an example). The predetermined effect image shown in FIG. 48 (A) is an image G16 of a roulette stand for displaying a predetermined effect pattern (for example, announcing a result such as “〇” or “×” after variable display. See FIG. 47). It includes the image G17 of the effect pattern. The display time of the predetermined effect image (the execution time of the predetermined effect) is, for example, a time corresponding to the effect time of the selected predetermined effect pattern. In addition, the black arrow "↓" of the image G17 represents that the predetermined effect pattern is changing. In the predetermined effect, when the image G17 showing the result "o" is displayed after the image G17 showing the state of fluctuation is displayed (the image G17 showing the state during fluctuation is displayed the result "x" When the image G17 is displayed once and finally the image G17 indicating the result "o" is displayed, the same applies to the normal variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state. While the normally variable winning prize ball device 6B is in the open state, the display is switched from the result "o" to the word "in opening", for example. In addition, while the normally variable winning prize ball device 6B is in the open state, the result "o" may be kept displayed. On the other hand, when the image G17 indicating the result “x” is displayed after the image G17 indicating the change is displayed, the normal variable winning prize ball device 6B is not controlled to the open state.

  FIGS. 48C and 48D are diagrams showing an example of the display operation in the display area of the image display device 5. FIGS. 48C and 48D show display operations arranged in time series. In FIG. 48 (C), the arrow (white arrow) “↓” shown in the display area of the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing. In addition, the black arrow “」 ”of the image G17 indicates that the predetermined effect pattern is changing.

  FIG. 48 (C) shows a scene in which a predetermined effect is performed during variable display of a decorative symbol. The display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 48C includes an image (Z value = 9) of a decorative symbol including the decorative symbol in a variable display and an active display image G7 (active display M31). A predetermined effect image (Z value = 8) including a reserve display image (Z value = 5) and an image G16 of a roulette stand and an image G17 of a predetermined effect pattern is displayed.

  FIG. 48 (D) shows a scene in which a predetermined effect is performed while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 48 (D), an image (Z value = 9) of the decorative symbol including the decorative symbol in the stop display, the image G16 of the roulette stand, and the image G17 of the predetermined effect symbol And a predetermined effect image (Z value = 10) including.

  In the above description, when the predetermined effect is performed during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the predetermined effect is performed on the back of the decorative symbol during the stop display, but the stop display is performed even during the stop display of the decorative symbol. After a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, one second has elapsed) after that, as shown in FIG. 48E, a predetermined effect may be executed on the front surface of the decorative symbol in the stop display.

  FIG. 48E shows a scene in which a predetermined effect is being performed during stop display of the decorative symbol (after a predetermined time has elapsed since the stop display). In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 48 (E), an image (Z value = 9) of the decorative symbol including the decorative symbol in the stop display, the image G16 of the roulette stand, and the image G17 of the predetermined effect symbol And a predetermined effect image (Z value = 8) including.

  As described above, the error notification image (FIG. 28 (A)), the effect execution notification image (FIG. 28 (B)), the character effect effect image (FIG. 28 (C)), the display image such as hold (FIG. 29 (A)), The group notice effect image (FIG. 29B), the chance zone effect image (FIG. 29C), the step-up notice effect image (FIG. 29D), the predetermined effect image (FIG. 48B), etc. Although the Z value of the image has been described, the Z value of another image other than the above will be described below.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of the Z value and the like of another image. FIG. 49 (A) shows a cumulative award ball number notification image (an example) for reporting the cumulative award ball number. The cumulative award ball number notification image shown in FIG. 49A includes a pictogram image G18 notifying that the predetermined cumulative number of award balls (for example, 3000, 5000, 10000, etc.) has been reached. In addition, the pictogram image G18 of FIG. 49 (A) alert | reports having reached 5000 pieces. The display time of the cumulative award ball number notification image (the notification time of the cumulative award ball number) may be, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or may be an end of the round. The display time of the cumulative award ball number notification image may be varied according to the cumulative award ball number to be notified.

  FIG. 49 (B) shows a winning ball number notification image (an example) for reporting the number of winning balls for each big hit. The prize ball number notification image shown in FIG. 49B includes a pictogram image G19 notifying that the predetermined cumulative number of prize balls (for example, 1000, 2000, etc.) has been reached. In addition, the pictogram image G19 of FIG. 49 (B) alert | reports having reached 2000 pieces. The display time (the notification time of the cumulative award number of balls) of the award number of balls notification image may be, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or may be the end of the round. The display time of the prize ball number notification image may be varied according to the number of prize balls to be notified.

  FIG. 49C shows an open effect image (an example) displayed when the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is in the open state. The in-opening effect image shown in FIG. 49C includes an image G20 for notifying what round the current round is, and a frame image G21 for performing in-opening effect. In FIG. 49C, a character or the like is displayed on the frame image G21 as an effect being released, but is not shown.

  FIG. 49D shows Z values set for the respective images shown in FIGS. 28A and 49A to 49C. According to the Z value setting shown in FIG. 49 (D), the cumulative award ball number notification image is displayed on the front of the effect image during opening, and the award ball number notification image is displayed on the front of the cumulative award ball number notification image. An error notification image (see FIG. 28A) is displayed in front of the prize ball number notification image. Note that the Z value of each image is not limited to the example of FIG. 49 (D). For example, instead of FIG. 49D, the Z value may be set to each image as shown in FIG. 49E, or the Z value may be set to each image as shown in FIG. 49F. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 49 (G), the Z value may be set for each image.

  FIG. 50 is a conceptual diagram schematically showing layers of various images. When a Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 49D, an error notification image having a Z value of “0” is displayed on the foremost layer as shown in FIG. 50A. The prize ball number notification image having the Z value “1” is displayed on one layer behind the error notification image, and the cumulative prize ball number notification image having the Z value “2” is one of the prize ball number notification images The in-release effect image having the Z value “3” is displayed on the back layer, and is displayed on one back layer of the cumulative award ball number notification image. Also, as shown in FIG. 49 (D), when the Z value is set for each image, when the error notification, award ball number notification, cumulative award ball number notification, and the execution period of the effect during opening overlap, the image In the display area of the display device 5, for example, each image is displayed as shown in FIG. 50 (B).

  FIG. 51 is a conceptual diagram schematically showing layers of various images. When a Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 49 (G), as shown in FIG. 51 (A), the cumulative award ball number informing image having the Z value “0” is the forefront. The prize ball number notification image displayed on the layer and having the Z value “1” is displayed on the layer on the back of one of the cumulative prize ball number notification images, and the error notification image having the Z value “2” is the prize ball number notification image The in-opening effect image having the Z value "3" is displayed in the layer on the back of the error notification image. Also, as shown in FIG. 49 (G), when the Z value is set for each image, when the accumulative ball number notification, the award ball number notification, the error notification, and the execution period of the effect during opening overlap, the image In the display area of the display device 5, for example, each image is displayed as shown in FIG. 51 (B).

  FIG. 52 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process during the round (step S175). In the description of FIG. 52A, it is assumed that the Z value is set to each image as shown in FIG. 49D. The flowchart of FIG. 52 (B) will be described later.

  In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 52A, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the notification icon after opening the special winning opening has been received (step S571).

  When it is determined that the notification command after the special winning opening has not been received (step S571; NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes the operation control of the effect being open in the fourth layer (Z value = 3) from the upper rank (Start, continue) (step S572). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 performs display control included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect during opening set as the use pattern in the big hit start process (see FIG. 32) and the round post process (see FIG. 32). By transmitting a display control command designated by data to the VDP of the display control unit 123 or the like, an open effect image (see FIG. 49C) corresponding to an open effect is displayed.

  After executing the process of step S572, the effect control CPU 120 executes an award ball number informing operation control process (step S573). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 adds the number of winning balls every time the large winning opening winning notification command is received in the present big hit gaming state, and the number of winning balls after the addition is a predetermined number (for example, 1000) When the number 2000 reaches 2000), operation control of the award ball number notification is executed (started and continued) in a second layer (Z value = 1) from the top for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the prize ball number notification as the use pattern, and displays the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern. By transmitting to the VDP of the control unit 123 or the like, a prize ball number notification image (see FIG. 49B) corresponding to the prize ball number notification is displayed.

  After executing the process of step S573, the effect control CPU 120 executes a cumulative award ball number informing operation control process (step S574). Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control accumulates the number of award balls every time the big winning opening winning notice command is received in the continuous big hit gaming state (the big hitting gaming state which is continuously shifted without becoming the normal state). Is added, and the cumulative number of award balls after the addition reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000, 5000, 10000, etc.), the third layer (Z value from the top) for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) At 2), execute (start, continue) operation control of cumulative prize ball number notification. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the cumulative award ball number notification as the use pattern, and also includes the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern. By transmitting to the VDP of the display control unit 123 or the like, a cumulative award ball number notification image (see FIG. 49A) corresponding to the cumulative award ball number notification is displayed. Then, the process is ended during the round. In addition, whether or not it became a normal state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (whether or not transition to the low probability low base state) received a gaming state specification command (designation to transition to the low probability low base state) It may be determined based on whether or not it is the same as the main substrate 11 side on the side of the effect control board 12, and may be determined by managing (counting) the number of times ST (number of positive variations) or the number of time reductions.

  When it is determined that the big winning opening open notification command has been received (step S571; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect during closing (step S576), and the value of the effect process flag corresponds to the round post process The value is updated to "6" (step S577), and the round is ended.

  In the above description, the type of the big hit is determined based on the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, but the condition for determining the type of big hit is not limited to this. For example, even if a specific area is provided in the vicinity of the inside of the big winning opening or inside the big winning opening and the game ball enters (passes) to the specific area, the type of the big hit is determined. Good. Specifically, for example, the probability variation big hit may be determined based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area in the big hit gaming state. Further, when the probability variation big hit is decided based on the game ball having entered the specific area, the decision of the probability variation big hit may be notified (probability variation decision notification).

  FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating an example of the Z value and the like of another image. FIG. 53 (A) shows a probability variation confirmation notification image (an example) for reporting the determination of probability variation big hit. The definite variation confirmation informing image shown in FIG. 53 (A) includes a character image G22 for informing the word "precise variation!".

  FIG. 53 (B) is a Z value set to the probability variation confirmation notification image shown in FIG. 28 (A), FIG. 49 (A) to FIG. 49 (C), and FIG. 53 (A). According to the setting of the Z value shown in FIG. 53 (B), the cumulative award ball number notification image is displayed on the front of the effect image being released, and the award ball number notification image is displayed on the front of the cumulative award ball number notification image. The probability variation confirmation notification image is displayed in front of the prize ball number notification image, and the error notification image is displayed in front of the probability variation confirmation notification image. Note that the Z value of each image is not limited to the example of FIG. 53 (B). For example, instead of FIG. 53 (B), the Z value may be set to each image as shown in any of FIGS. 53 (C) to 53 (G).

  FIG. 54 is a conceptual diagram schematically showing layers of various images. When a Z value is set to each image as shown in FIG. 53 (B), an error notification image having a Z value “0” is displayed on the foremost layer as shown in FIG. 54 (A). And a probability variation confirmation notification image having a Z value “1” is displayed on one layer behind the error notification image, and a prize ball number notification image having a Z value “2” is a layer on the back one of the probability variation determination notification images The cumulative award ball number notification image having the Z value “3” is displayed on one back layer of the award ball number notification image, and the effect image in the open having the Z value “4” is the cumulative award ball number notification Displayed in a layer one back of the image. In addition, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), when the Z value is set to each image, the execution period of the error notification, the definite variation confirmation notification image, the award ball number notification, the cumulative award ball number notification, the effect during opening is When overlapping, each image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 54 (B), for example.

  FIG. 52 (B) is a flow chart showing an example of in-round processing (step S175) in a mode in which a probability variation confirmation informing image is displayed when a probability variation big hit is decided based on the game ball entering the specific area. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 52 (B), the same steps as in FIG. 52 (A) are assigned the same step numbers. As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 52 (B), in a mode in which the probability variation confirmation notification image is displayed when the probability variation big hit is decided, the effect control CPU 120 executes the cumulative prize ball number notification operation control processing (step S574) After the process, the definite variation confirmation informing operation control process is executed (step S575). That is, when the game control CPU 120 receives the definite variation confirmation notification command and the definite variation confirmation notification command (not shown) transmitted from the main substrate 11 when the gaming medium passes through the specific area, the predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) A predetermined layer (for example, when the Z value is set to each image as shown in FIG. 53B), the second layer from the top (Z value = 1), for example, as shown in FIG. As described above, when the Z value is set to each image, operation control of the definite variation confirmation notification is executed (started and continued) on the highest layer (Z value = 0). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the definite variation confirmation notification as a use pattern, and displays and controls a display control instruction specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern set. By transmitting the information to the VDP of the unit 123 or the like, a probable variation confirmation notification image (see FIG. 53A) corresponding to the probable variation confirmation notification is displayed.

  In the above description, although one type of the character effect effect image displayed corresponding to the movement of the movable character 17 is one type, the character effect effect image displayed corresponding to the movement of the movable character 17 May be two or more. In addition, in the case where there are two types of combination effect effect images displayed corresponding to the movement of the movable role product 17, the same Z value may be set to the two types of combination effect effect images. Different Z values may be set. In addition, in the case where there are three or more types of combination effect effect images displayed corresponding to the movement of the movable character 17, the same Z value may be set to all the combination effect effect images, or at least A Z-value different from that of another combination effect effect image may be set for one type of combination effect effect image.

  In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with one movable body (movable character 17), but two or more movable bodies may be provided. In the aspect provided with two or more movable bodies, each feature effect effect image displayed corresponding to the movement of each movable body may be prepared. In addition, the same Z value may be set to each of the above-mentioned combination effect effect images, or different Z values may be set. For example, when there are two types of character effect effect images (for example, character effect effect image a corresponding to the movement of movable body A, character effect effect image b corresponding to the movement of movable body B), 2 The same Z value may be set to the kind of character effect effect image a, b, or different Z value may be set to each of the two kinds of character effect effect images a, b. In addition, three types of character effect effect images (for example, character effects effect image c corresponding to the movement of the movable body C, character effects effect image d corresponding to the movement of the movable body D, movement of the movable body E If there is a feature effect effect image e) to be played, the same Z value may be set for all three types, or different Z values may be set for all three types, or the same for two types. The Z value (for example, 4) may be set and another different Z value (for example, 6) may be set. The same applies to the case where there are four or more types of role effect effect images. In addition, when there are a plurality of combination effect effect images in which the same Z value is set in a mode including two or more movable bodies, the display areas of the respective combination effect effect images in which the same Z value is set overlap It may not be possible. In other words, the same Z value may be set for the combination effect effect image in which the display areas do not overlap.

  In the above description, the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the SU 5 is set in the effect execution notification operation control process (step S547) in the variable display effect process (step S172) (step S9063), but variable In the display start setting process (step S171), an effect control pattern corresponding to notification of execution of SU 5 may be set. Specifically, when it is determined that the step-up notice effect (SU5) is to be executed in the step-up notice effect determining process of step S530A, the effect control pattern corresponding to SU5 in the process of setting the effect control pattern of step S532. May be set as the usage pattern, and the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of SU 5 may be set.

  In the above description, the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the group advance effect is set in the effect execution notification operation control process (step S547) in the variable display effect processing (step S172) (S9067). In the variable display start setting process (step S171), an effect control pattern corresponding to notification of execution of group advance effect may be set. Specifically, when it is determined to execute the group notice effect in the group notice effect determining process in step S530B, the effect control pattern corresponding to the group notice effect is used in the process of setting the effect control pattern in step S532. While setting it as, it is possible to set the production control pattern which corresponds to execution announcement of group announcement production.

  In the above description, the effect control pattern corresponding to the notification of the execution of the object effect is set in the effect execution notification operation control process (step S547) in the variable display effect process (step S172) (S9071), In the variable display start setting process (step S171), an effect control pattern corresponding to notification of execution of a feature effect may be set. Specifically, in the case of the variation pattern of super reach β, in the process of setting the effect control pattern of step S532, the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of super reach β is set as a usage pattern, and An effect control pattern corresponding to an execution notification of an object effect may be set.

  Further, in the above description, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the Z value of the pictogram image G3-1 for notifying the first effect of notification start order in the case of the notification number 3 is “3” and the notification number is 2 or more. If the Z value of the pictogram image G3-2 for notifying the second effect in the notification start order is "2" and the notification number is 1 or more, the pictogram image G3-3 for notifying the third effect in the notification start order The Z value of the pictogram image G3-1 is "1", the Z value of the pictogram image G3-1 is "1", the Z value of the pictogram image G3-2 is "2", and the Z value of the pictogram image G3-3 is "1." It may be 3 ". That is, when displaying a plurality of effect execution notification images, instead of displaying a new one on the upper level (front side), a new one may be displayed on the lower side (rear side).

  In the above description, the setting range of the Z value is 0 to 9 (or 0 to 10), but the setting range of the Z value is not limited to the above. Also, the Z value may not necessarily be an integer.

  In the above description, the Z value of the step-up notice effect image is constant (Z value = 8) regardless of the number of steps (SU1 to SU5) (FIG. 27), but the Z value is made different according to the number of steps. May be For example, the Z values of SU1 to SU3 may be 8, and the Z values of SU4 and SU5 may be 7.5. Further, in the above description, the display size of the step-up notice effect image is set large (FIG. 27), but the display size may be varied according to the number of steps. For example, the display sizes of SU1 to SU3 may be small, and the display sizes of SU4 and SU5 may be large.

  In addition, the chance zone rendition may have a plurality of chance zones (a low expectation zone, a middle expectation zone, a high expectation zone) having different degrees of expectation, and if the Z value is different according to the degree of expectation You may There may be a transition from the low expectation zone to the middle expectation zone (or a high expectation zone) or a transition from the middle expectation zone to the high expectation zone. The Z value may be changed when shifting to another expectation chance zone.

  FIG. 31 (B) shows a scene in which all seven types of images shown together with the Z value in FIG. 27 are simultaneously displayed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not simultaneously display all the seven types of images. May be Further, FIG. 50 (B) shows a scene in which all four types of images shown together with the Z value in FIG. 49 are simultaneously displayed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not simultaneously display all the four types of images. May be Further, FIG. 54 (B) shows a scene where all five types of images shown together with the Z value in FIG. 53 are simultaneously displayed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not simultaneously display all the five types of images described above. May be Note that not displaying at the same time means that rendering or notification is not performed (that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes only a part of the seven types of rendering shown in FIG. 27A, or FIG. And in regard to FIG. 54, in order to execute only a part of the notification of the award ball number notification, the cumulative award ball number notification, and the definite variation confirmation notification), the case of not simultaneously displaying, or executing the effect, the notification, etc. Since the timing is different, the display may not be simultaneously displayed. Moreover, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not display the predetermined effect image shown in FIG. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to execute the predetermined effect process shown in FIG.

  Further, although the seven types of images shown in FIG. 27 all have different Z values, the Z values of at least some of the images may be the same. The same applies to the images in FIG. 49 and FIG. When displaying images of the same Z value, each may not overlap. For example, when an image A having a certain Z value is displayed, the image B having the same Z value as the image A may not be displayed. Further, the display start timing of the image B may be delayed until the display end timing of the image A. In addition, when the image B is displayed, the image A may be hidden (that is, the display end timing of the image A may be advanced). Also, for example, by changing the display position or the display size of the image B (or changing the display position or the display size of the image A, or changing the display positions or the display sizes of the image A and the image B) Image A and image B may not overlap.

  In the above description, although an example in which an error notification image is displayed when a magnetic abnormality occurs (see FIG. 27), other errors (for example, an error based on opening of a glass door, an error based on detection of vibration) The error notification image may be displayed when an error or the like based on the lower limit is reached. The Z value may be different depending on the type of error. For example, it is possible to set the Z value of an error based on lower bound to a value between 3 and 4 (for example, 3.5 or the like) and the Z value of another error as 0.

  27B, the Z value of the decorative symbol is 9, but the Z value of the symbol (always small symbol) displayed on the image display device 5 separately from the decorative symbol is a value between 0 and 1 ((1) For example, it may be 0.5 or the like, or may be the top priority (Z value = 0). In addition, it is not necessary to always express the reach state (a state in which all three symbols are displayed in a variable display, or a display in which all three symbols are in a stop display). May be expressed in either of

  In the above description, the Z value of the first effect execution notification image is 3, the Z value of the second effect execution notification image is 2, and the Z value of the third effect execution notification image is 1 ( 27), the first Z value may be 1, and when the second is displayed, the first Z value may be changed from 1 to 2 and the second Z value may be 1. Furthermore, when the third is displayed, the first Z value may be changed from 2 to 3, the second Z value may be changed from 1 to 2, and the third Z value may be 1.

  In addition, as shown to FIG. 44, FIG. 45, there exist multiple display timings of each of several presentation execution alerting images, and the display order of the presentation of alerting | reporting object is not constant. For example, in FIG. 44, the notification target effect (group advance notice) is displayed first, and in FIG. 45, the notification target effect (SU5) is displayed first. Although not shown in FIG. 44 and FIG. 45, there may be a case where the notification target effect (character) is displayed first.

  In the above description, the notification target effect of the effect execution notification is the step-up notice effect step 5 (SU5), the group notice effect, and the feature effect, but other effects (for example, title notice effect, next notice effect , A mini character preview effect, a cut-in effect, etc.) may be set as a notification target effect of the effect execution notification. In addition, the notification target effect may be one type, two types, or four or more types. A mission achievement display using a mobile terminal (mobile phone, smart phone, etc.) may be displayed as a presentation of presentation execution notification.

  Further, in FIG. 48, the relationship between the Z value of the predetermined effect image, the Z value of the decorative pattern during variable display, and the Z value of the decorative pattern during stop display (predetermined effect image, decorative pattern during variable display, stop display Although the order of priority of the decorative design in) has been described, the relationship with images other than the predetermined effect image may be the same. That is, in FIG. 48, the Z value of the decorative symbol in the stop display <the Z value of the predetermined effect image <the Z value of the decorative symbol in the variable display (the priority of the decorative symbol in the stop display) the priority of the predetermined effect image> Although the priority of the decorative symbol during the variable display is described as the above, the same relationship may be applied to other effect images. As an example, the Z value of the decorative symbol in the variable display may be 9 (as in FIG. 48), and the Z value of the decorative symbol in the stop display may be a value between 0 and 1 (for example, 0.5). . Thereby, the decorative symbol (Z value = 9) in the variable display is displayed on the back of the display image for holding etc. (Z value = 5) or the chance zone effect image (Z value = 7), for example. The inside decorative pattern (Z value = 0.5) is displayed in front of the display image for holding etc. and the chance zone effect image. The other effect images are not limited to those shown in FIG. 27 and the like, and are, for example, a demo image, a menu image, a music selection image, a music display image, a right hit notification image, a left hit notification image, etc. It is also good. That is, the decorative pattern in the stop display can be visually recognized without being disturbed by other effects. When the symbol stop command is received, the Z value of the decorative symbol is changed from 9 (first value) to 0.5 (second value) (for example, when the finalized decorative symbol in step S722 is stopped and displayed) You may change the Z value of the decoration pattern from 0.5 (second value) to 9 (first value) when the next fluctuation pattern specification command is received). . As described in FIG. 48 (E), the Z value of the decorative pattern is returned from 0.5 (second value) to 9 (first value) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the stop display. You may do so. The Z value of the decorative symbol in the stop display is set to a value between 0 and 1 in order to set the priority of the decorative symbol in the stop display as the priority following the error notification image.

  In the predetermined effect operation control process of FIG. 48, the Z value of the predetermined effect image is changed according to whether the decorative symbol is being displayed variably or being stopped, but the above-mentioned and other effects Similarly to the case, the Z value of the predetermined effect image is fixed (for example, 8), and the Z value of the decorative pattern is changed according to whether variable display or stop display is being performed (for example, Z value during variable display) = 9, and during stop display, Z value may be 0.5).

  In the above description, the Z value of the hold display is the same as the Z value of the active display, but the Z value of the hold display may be different from the Z value of the active display. For example, Z value of active display <Z value of hold display (priority of active display> priority of hold display) may be adopted. As an example, Z value of active display <Z value of super reach image <Z value of hold display (priority of active display> priority of super reach image> priority of hold display). Thus, for example, during the super reach, the hold indication may not be visible, but the active indication may be visible. In addition, the Z value of the small symbol (small symbol for effect) displayed in a mode in which the decorative symbol is reduced during super reach may be the same Z value as the active display, or the Z between the active display and the super reach image. It may be a value.

  In the above description, although the probability variation confirmation notification image is displayed when the probability variation jackpot is determined based on the game ball entering the specific area in the jackpot gaming state, the probability variation confirmation notification image is displayed as the image of probability variation promotion effect You may do it. Further, instead of or in addition to the definite variation confirmation notification image, another image (for example, an image of a round number promotion effect, an image to notify of the gaming state) may be displayed. Note that the image notifying of the gaming state may be, for example, an image notifying of becoming an advantageous state (for example, an image notifying of becoming a high base in addition to the probability variation confirmation notifying image, a specific variation pattern table An image or the like notifying that a fluctuation pattern of fluctuation time shortened as time saving control is selected or likely to be referred to) is included.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, high base state, high probability state, etc.) advantageous to the player. Determining means for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state (for example, processing for determining special drawing display result in special symbol normal processing (step S240), processing for determining big hit type (step S242), etc.), and the determination Determining means for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state before determination of the means (for example, a process for determining whether or not the random value MR1 is within the big hit determination in the random number value determining process at the time of winning (step) S406) and the process of determining the jackpot type (step S407) and the like, and the effect image (for example, various effect images shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 48, etc.) The effect execution means to be executed (for example, the chance zone effect operation control process of step S543, the step-up notice effect operation control process of step S544, etc.) is provided, and the effect execution means is based on the determination of the determination means A first notice effect (eg, step up notice effect etc.) using a first effect image (eg, step up notice effect image etc.) as the notice effect to be executed, and a notice effect executed based on the determination of the determination means It is possible to execute a second notice effect (eg, chance zone effect etc.) using the second effect image (eg, chance zone effect image etc.) as an image display of the second effect image in comparison with the first effect image The priority order of is set high (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, the chance zone effect image of Z value “7” has Z value “8”. Is displayed on the front side than the step-up announcement attraction image).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display a diversifying effect image.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a high base state, a high probability state, etc.) advantageous to the player. Determining means for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state (for example, processing for determining special drawing display result in special symbol normal processing (step S240), processing for determining big hit type (step S242), etc.), and the determination Determining means for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state before determination of the means (for example, a process for determining whether or not the random value MR1 is within the big hit determination in the random number value determining process at the time of winning (step) S406) and the process of determining the jackpot type (step S407) and the like, and the effect image (for example, various effect images shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 48, etc.) An effect execution means to be executed (for example, the chance zone effect operation control process of step S543, a group advance effect operation control process of step S545, etc.), and the effect execution means is executed based on the determination of the determination means The first notice effect (eg, group notice effect etc.) using the first effect image (eg, group notice effect image etc.) as the notice effect produced and the second notice effect executed based on the determination of the determination means It is possible to execute a second notice effect (for example, chance zone effect etc.) using the effect image (for example, chance zone effect image etc.), and the first effect image is compared with the second effect image and the priority of the image display Is set high (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, the group advance effect image of Z value “6” is displayed in front of the chance zone effect image of Z value “7”. ).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display a diversifying effect image.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine that plays a game, and performs rendering using rendering images (for example, various rendering images shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 48, etc.) Effect executing means (for example, group notice effect operation control process of step S545, combination product operation control process of step S546, etc.), the effect executing means is interlocked with the operation of the movable body (the movable object 17 etc.) Interlocking effects (for example, character effects effects etc.) using interlocked images (for example character effects effect images etc.) to be displayed, and non-linked images (for example It is possible to execute non-interlocking rendering (for example, group preview rendering etc.) using the group preview presentation image etc.), and the interlocking image is set to have a higher priority of image display (for example, As shown in FIG. , Character object effect effect image Z value "4" is displayed on the front side of the group announcement attraction image Z value "6").

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display a diversifying effect image. Although it has been described that the interlocked image is displayed interlocked with the operation of the movable body, the display start timing of the interlocked image and the operation start timing of the movable body do not necessarily have to coincide with each other. The display end timing and the operation end timing of the movable body may not necessarily coincide with each other. In other words, an image of a display time that does not match the operation time of the movable body may be included in the interlocked image. For example, an image that notifies the player that the movable body is operating is displayed before the start of the operation of the movable body, and an image that is displayed after the operation of the movable body is finished and gives the player a sense of the operation of the movable body included. Further, the display content of the interlocked image may be display content adapted to the shape, operation or the like of the movable body (for example, the display content of the interlocked image shown in FIG. Although the combined circular effect image G4 is used), the display content of the interlocked image does not have to be the display content according to the shape, operation, and the like of the movable body. In other words, an image of display content that does not match the shape, operation, or the like of the movable body may be included in the interlocked image. For example, when the movable body operates, if it is an image related to the movement of the movable body (an image for notifying, complementing, emphasizing the movement of the movable body, etc.), the display content irrelevant to the shape, the movement, etc. Even the image is included in the linked image.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol), and stores variable display not yet started as hold information. Hold storage means (eg, first special view hold storage unit 151A, second special view hold storage unit 151B, first start winning reception command buffer 194A, second start winning reception command buffer 194B, etc.), and the hold storage Hold display means (for example, a process of adding a hold display in the effect determination process at the time of winning (eg, steps S162 and S165) for displaying a hold image (for example, a display image etc. for hold) corresponding to the hold information stored in the means A process of digesting the hold display in the variable display start setting process (step S531) and the like, and an effect image (for example, FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 4) And the like. (E.g., the product operation control process of step S546 etc.) for executing the effect using various effect images etc.) shown in FIG. 17) can be performed using interlocking images (eg, character-effect effect images etc.) displayed interlockingly with the operation of 17)), and the interlocked image is the hold image The priority of the image display is set to be higher than that of (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, the bonus effect effect image of Z value “4” is higher than the display image of the hold etc. of Z value “5”. Displayed on the front side).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display a diversifying effect image.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine that plays a game, and performs rendering using rendering images (for example, various rendering images shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 48, etc.) As shown in FIG. 27A (for example, the group announcement effect operation control process in step S545, the chance zone effect operation control process in step S543, and the like). The first effect (for example, chance zone effect etc.) using the first effect image (for example, chance zone effect image etc.) in the image size “small” area and the second area (FIG. 27) wider than the first area As shown in (A), it is possible to execute a second effect (for example, a group notice effect or the like) using a second effect image (for example, a group notice effect image or the like) in the image size “large” area) 2 staging The priority of the image display is set to be higher than that of the first effect image (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, the group announcement effect image of Z value “6” has a chance zone of Z value “7” Displayed on the front side of the effect image).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display a diversifying effect image. In addition, the second effect image may be set to have a higher priority for image display as compared to the first effect image, and the first effect image and the second effect image may be chance zone effect images or group advance effect images. It is not limited. For example, as a first effect image (or a second effect image), an error notification image, a display image such as hold, a feature effect effect image, a step-up notice effect image, a predetermined effect image, a probability variation confirmation image, an award ball number notification Image, cumulative award ball number notification image may be displayed, or other images (demo image, menu image, music selection image, right hit notification image, left turn back notification image, promotion image, small symbol image, etc.) , And may be displayed as a first effect image (or a second effect image).

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine that plays a game, and performs rendering using rendering images (for example, various rendering images shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 29, FIG. 48, etc.) Effect execution means (for example, the chance zone effect operation control process of step S543, the step-up notice effect operation control process of step S544, etc.), the effect execution means is shown in the first area (FIG. 27A) The first effect (for example, chance zone effect etc.) using the first effect image (for example, chance zone effect image etc.) in the image size "small" area and the second area (figure The second effect (for example, step-up preview) using the second effect image (for example, step-up notice effect image or the like) in the image size “large” area as shown in 27 (A) Etc., and the first effect image is set to have a higher priority for image display than the second effect image (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, a chance of Z value “7” The zone effect image is displayed on the front side of the step-up notice effect image of Z value “8”).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display a diversifying effect image. In addition, the first effect image may be set higher in priority of image display as compared to the second effect image, and the first effect image and the second effect image may be chance zone effect images or step-up notice effect images It is not limited to. For example, as a first effect image (or a second effect image), an error notification image, a display image such as hold, a feature effect effect image, a step-up notice effect image, a predetermined effect image, a probability variation confirmation image, an award ball number notification Image, cumulative award ball number notification image may be displayed, or other images (demo image, menu image, music selection image, right hit notification image, left turn back notification image, promotion image, small symbol image, etc.) , And may be displayed as a first effect image (or a second effect image).

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes notification means (for example, an error notification process in step S75, etc.) for performing notification using a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28 etc.) The means can notify an error using an error notification image (for example, an error notification image shown in FIG. 28), and the error notification image is set to have a higher priority for image display as compared to the effect image. (For example, as shown in FIG. 30, the error notification image of Z value “0” is displayed on the front side of the combination effect effect image of Z value “4”, for example).

  According to such a configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed. For example, the effect image can be suitably displayed without disturbing the error notification.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with notification means (for example, effect execution notification operation control processing in step S547, etc.) for performing notification using a notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28 etc.). The notification means is an information image indicating that the specific effect has been executed when the specific effect (for example, step 5 (SU 5) of the step-up advance effect effect, group advance effect, feature effect effect, etc.) is executed. For example, notification can be made using a presentation execution notification image or the like, and the information image is set to have a high priority (for example, as shown in FIG. 30, the presentation execution notification image has a Z value “1”). ~ "3" is set).

  According to such a configuration, the visibility of the information image can be enhanced.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect execution means is a first interlocked image (for example, a character effect effect image) displayed in conjunction with the operation of the first movable body (for example, the movable body A or the like described above). Using the second interlocking image (for example, the character-effect effect image b) displayed in conjunction with the first interlocking effect using a) and the operation of the second movable body (for example, the above-mentioned movable body B etc.) The second interlocking effect can be executed, and the first interlocked image may be set to have a priority different from that of the second interlocked image (for example, as described above, the role-effect effect image a and the role-effect Different Z values may be set to the object effect effect image b).

  According to such a configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed. For example, effect images according to the movable body can be suitably displayed in different priorities.

  The first interlocked image may have the same priority as that of the second interlocked image (for example, as described above, the first interlocked image is the same as the role effect effect image a and the function effect effect image b May set the Z value of

  According to such a configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed. For example, effect images according to the movable body can be suitably displayed in the same priority order.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a variable display means for performing variable display of identification information (for example, a decorative symbol etc.) (for example, processing of setting a production control pattern corresponding to a fluctuation pattern in the variable display start setting processing Step S532) or processing (step S542) for variably displaying a decorative symbol based on the effect control pattern set in the variable display effect processing, etc.) For example, a predetermined effect image (for example, a predetermined effect image shown in FIG. 48 (B) or the like) as an effect notifying that the variable winning device (for example, the normally variable winning ball device 6B etc.) is controlled to the high base state etc.) Can be executed (for example, a predetermined effect to be executed in the predetermined effect process shown in FIG. 46) using The priority of the image display is set higher than the identification information at least in the predetermined period during the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 48C), during the variable display of the decorative symbol, the predetermined effect image is displayed The priority of the image display is set lower than that of the identification information at least in a predetermined period during stop display (for example, as shown in FIG. 48D) During stop display of the symbol, the predetermined effect image is displayed in a layer lower than the decorative symbol).

  According to such a configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed. For example, the predetermined effect image can be suitably displayed depending on whether the identification information is being displayed in a variable manner or in a stopped state.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes notification using the notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 49, FIG. 53, etc.) (for example, notification of the number of balls in step S573). Operation control processing, cumulative award ball number notification operation control processing of step S574, etc.), the notification means uses a first value notification image (for example, award ball number notification image, etc.) for a specific period (each big hit) The special period (for example, normal condition) using the size of the value (for example, the number of winning balls for the big hit) and the second value notification image (for example, the cumulative number of balls for winning notification etc) Can be notified of the size of the value (for example, the number of accumulated winning balls in a row of consecutive winnings, etc.) acquired in the big hit gaming state etc. which is continuously transferred without becoming Different from the second value notification image Priority is set that (for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (D), are set different Z value and the cumulative prize counts notification image for prize balls number notification image).

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs notification using an notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 49, FIG. 53, etc.) (for example, error notification processing in step S75 or , The award ball number informing operation control process of step S573, the accumulated award ball number informing operation control process of step S574, and the like, the informing means includes an error informing image (for example, an error informing image or the like shown in FIG. 28) The error and the value of the value (for example, winning balls number etc.) acquired using the value notifying image (for example, winning balls number notification image, cumulative winning ball number notification image etc.) can be notified using Different priorities are set for the notification image and the value notification image (for example, as shown in FIG. 49D, the error notification image is different from the award ball number notification image and the cumulative award ball number notification image in the error notification image Z value is set ).

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs notification using an notification image (for example, various notification images shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 49, FIG. 53, etc.) (for example, error notification processing in step S75 or , And the notification means includes an error notification image (e.g., an error notification image shown in FIG. 28) and a status notification image (e.g., FIG. 53). State (for example, after the end of the big hit gaming state) using the probability variation confirmation notification image shown in the image, an image notifying that it is high base, an image notifying that a specific variation pattern table is referred to, etc.) In addition, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to be controlled to a high base state etc. after the end of the big hit gaming state, etc.), and different priorities are set for the error notification image and the state notification image. It may be those who are (e.g., as shown in FIG. 53 (B), the error notification image is set different Z value from the probability variation determined notification image).

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

  In addition, although a small symbol is displayed corresponding to the variable display of a decorative symbol on the image display device 5, the image of a small symbol may be set higher in the priority of the image display compared with the effect image . For example, the image of the small symbol may be set to have a higher priority of the image display as compared with the error notification image (except for the error notification image notifying a serious error that causes a game stop).

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the apparatus configuration and data configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the processing shown by the flowchart, various rendering operations including the display operation of effect images in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. Can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the display mode of a pending | holding display is set to three colors, white, yellow, and red (refer FIG. 35), the display mode of a pending | holding display is not limited to this. For example, the other three colors (for example, three colors of white, blue and red, and three colors of gray, light blue and purple) different from at least one of the above three colors (white, yellow and red) may be used. And may be two or four or more colors. Moreover, patterns, shapes, and sizes may be different. The same applies to the active display. Similar effects can be obtained by such a configuration. In addition, there may be a display mode exclusively for active display which is not displayed as the hold display. This will improve interest.

  In the above embodiment, the display mode of the hold display is changed at the time of shift, but instead of or in addition to the shift time, the display mode of the hold display may be changed at another timing. For example, it may be changed during variable display of the decorative symbol. The same applies to the active display. Similar effects can be obtained by such a configuration. In addition, interest is improved.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the display mode of a pending | holding display and the display mode of an active display are determined simultaneously (by determination of 1), you may determine separately. In the above embodiment, the display mode of the hold display at each display position is collectively determined at the time of winning, but the display mode of the hold display after shift may be determined each time the shift is made. In the above embodiment, the display mode of the active display is determined at the time of winning, but the display mode of the active display may be determined when displaying in the active display area AHA. Similar effects can be obtained by such a configuration.

  In the above embodiment, whether it is a super reach (loss) (variation pattern "PA4-X" or "PA5-X") or a super reach (big hit) (variation pattern "PB4-X" Or, depending on whether it is "PB5-X", the decision ratio of the execution presence or absence of the step-up notice effect is made different (refer to FIG. 38A), but it is super reach α (variation pattern "PA4-X" Or “Super PB” (if it is variation pattern “PA5-X” or “PB5-X”), if the decision ratio of the execution presence / absence of the step-up notice effect is different You may The same applies to the determination ratio of the step-up notice effect pattern and the determination ratio of the group notice effect. In addition, it can be more strongly suggested whether it will be a big hit by making the determination ratio different depending on whether it is super reach (loss) or super reach (big hit). On the other hand, by making the determination ratio different depending on whether it is the super reach α or the super reach β, it is possible to more strongly suggest which super reach.

  In the above embodiment, the presence or absence of effect such as holding is determined according to the nonspecific pattern (loss), the specific pattern (loss), the nonspecific pattern (big hit), and the specific pattern (big hit) separately. Instead of the specific pattern (loss), the specific pattern (loss), the non-specific pattern (big hit), and the specific pattern (big hit), the presence or absence of effect such as holding is performed according to the category of the variation shown in FIG. You may decide. Moreover, the same applies to the determination of the effect pattern such as hold. In the mode of determining the presence or absence of presentation etc. according to the variation category, for example, the variation category shown in FIG. 20A at the time of winning is determined, and the variation category command according to the determined variation category You can send

  In the above embodiment, step-up notice effects and group notice effects are illustrated as main notice effects, but other effects (for example, title notice effect, next notice effect, mini character notice effect, cut-in effect, etc.) May be Similar effects can be obtained by such a configuration.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the variation category determination table for big hit (refer to FIG. 20C and FIG. 20D) is common to the number of reserved memories “0” to “4”, but variation category determination for lost time is determined. Similar to the tables (see FIGS. 20A and 20B) and the like, they may be divided by the number of pending storages.

  In the above embodiment, when the first special view reserve storage unit 151A and the second special view reserve storage unit 151B store reserve data (hold information), they are stored in the second special view reserve storage unit 151B. Although priority is given to reserve data (see FIG. 18), among the reserve data stored in the first special view reserve storage unit 151S and the second special view reserve storage unit 151B, the reserve data is reserved from the earliest winning order. Data may be digested. For example, a sorting device may be provided, and the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be made to alternately take place, and the holding data may be digested in the order of winning.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the “ratio” is not limited to one having a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B: C = 70%: 20%: 10. (B) and also in FIG. 38 (B) etc., those having a relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% or A: B: C = 70%: 30%: 0 (ie, It is a concept that includes 100% and 0% allocations.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the number of rounds is 2 types of 8 rounds and 16 rounds, three or more types of rounds may be sufficient. For example, there may be three types: 4R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, and 16R probability variation big hit. Further, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine in which only the probability variation big hit is provided as the big hit category is shown, but it may be a gaming machine including the non-probability variation big hit (normally big hit) as the big hit category.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment showed the aspect which carries out variable display of multiple types of special symbols, such as a number which shows "0"-"9", and a symbol which shows "-", and a display result is derived and displayed, the said variable display Is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the special symbol to be displayed variably may be different from the special symbol to be derived and displayed as the variable display result. In other words, special symbols that are not included in the changing multiple types of special symbols may be derived and displayed as the variable display result, and among the changing multiple types of special symbols, those that are not specially derived displayed as the variable display result May be included. Moreover, it is not necessary to variably display a plurality of types of special symbols, and the aspect may be such that variable display is performed using only one type of special symbol. As a variable display using one type of special symbol, for example, the one type of special symbol may be blinked (may be alternately turned on / off). That is, repetition of lighting and extinguishing may be variable display. And even in this case, the one kind of special symbol may be derived and displayed (lit) at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end It may be In addition, the same applies to variable display of other symbols (for example, a normal symbol, a decorative symbol, etc.).

  In the above embodiment, the big hit gaming state is controlled based on the big hit symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, but the big hit gaming state is controlled. The aspect to perform is not limited to this. For example, a specific area is provided in the vicinity of the second starting winning opening or inside the second starting winning opening, and is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the game ball entering (passing) in the specific area You may be there.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 12 of a change pattern indicating a change mode such as the change time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of pseudo-link, one change pattern specification command when starting the change. In the example of transmitting the change pattern, the effect control board 12 may be notified of the change pattern by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control is the first command before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slip effect (if it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and the second command after reaching reach such as reach type and re-lottery effect (if it does not reach, so-called (2) after the stop may be transmitted a command indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode. In this case, the effect control board 12 may perform effect control in the variable display based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. In the game control microcomputer 560, the variation time is notified by each of two commands, and the specific variation mode to be executed at each timing is selected by the effect control board 12 It is also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. As described above, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern designation command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the main substrate 11 stores the determination table for random number values (display result determination table, big hit type determination table, and variation category determination table), and is extracted from the main substrate 11 at the start winning prize. Based on the random number values (MR1 to MR3), the main substrate 11 refers to the random number value determination table and determines random number value determination processing (determination of whether or not to be a big hit, and determination of variation category, and if it is a big hit Shows an example of executing the judgment of the type of the big hit), the effect control board 12 receives the judgment result judged in the main board 11, and executes the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the received judgment result. The mode of execution of the prefetch advance notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the table for determining the random number is stored in the effect control board 12 and the random number itself is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (for example, the effect control command capable of specifying the random value from the main board 11) Is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the effect control board 12 receives the random number value itself extracted in the main board 11, and refers to the random number value determination table based on the received random number value and refers to the random number value. The pre-reading notice effect may be performed based on the determination result of the determination process. That is, the determination process of the random number value may be performed in the effect control board 12. Further, the determination process of the random number value may be performed on both the main substrate 11 and the effect control substrate 12. For example, the effect control board 12 may receive a part of random number values and execute the determination process of the random number values, and may receive the determination result determined in the main board 11. Specifically, for example, the effect control board 12 receives a random number (MR1 and MR2) and determines whether or not to be a big hit, and if it is a big hit, performs a type of big hit, and The determination result of the variation category determined by the main substrate 11 based on (MR3) may be received. That is, the effect control board 12 can execute the advance reading notice effect based on the determination result determined by itself and the determination result determined by the main substrate 11.

  The random numbers may not be synchronized by changing the update timing of each random number or changing the update range of each random number.

  In addition, for example, a gaming machine that gives a gaming score for use in a game by using a frequency that is a gaming value of a size specified by recording information of a gaming recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention can be applied. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into the game area.

  In the above description, it has been described that the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. It does not necessarily have to be stored in a table format (including, for example, a structure, an array, etc.). That is, although the determination value (decision value) to be compared with the extracted random value may be stored collectively in the ROM 101, it may be distributed (scattered) in a plurality of locations of the ROM 101 and stored. Alternatively, the ROM 101 may store an equation or program for outputting the result (for example, a big hit or a loss in the example of FIG. 6) when the extracted random number value is input. The same applies to the determination table and the like stored in the ROM 121.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted to set a predetermined bet number, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the control lever by the player. A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when the combination of stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player The present invention is also applicable to slot machines equipped with at least one of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus etc.).

  For example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a slot machine as described above, and effects (for example, establishment of bonus etc.) are realized using effect images (various images displayed on a liquid crystal screen of the slot machine). An interlocking effect using an interlocking image that is displayed interlockingly with the operation of the movable body (the movable body included in the slot machine); A slot machine capable of performing non-interlocking effects using non-interlocking images displayed without being interlocked with the movement of a movable body, wherein the interlocking image is set to have a higher priority for image display than non-interlocking images It may be The non-linked image is an image displayed without being linked to the movement of the movable body. Therefore, the non-linked image is an image that gives an image with a high frequency of appearance or information with a low degree of importance as compared to the linked image. For example, a green-based image compatible with weak watermelon, a push order navigation image, and the like are examples of non-linked images. The interlocked image is an image displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body. Therefore, the interlocked image is an image that gives an image with a low frequency of appearance or information with a high degree of importance as compared to the non-interlocked effect. For example, a red-based image compatible with strong cherries, an image regarding superimposition, an image of “Aim at 7!”, A movie image at the time of freeze, and the like are examples of linked images.

  For example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a slot machine as described above, and effects (for example, establishment of bonus etc.) are realized using effect images (various images displayed on a liquid crystal screen of the slot machine). A first effect (for example, a weak watermelon-compatible effect using a weak watermelon-compatible image) using a first effect image in the first area. And the second effect (the strong watermelon-compatible effect using the strong watermelon-compatible image, etc.) using the second effect image in the second region wider than the first region. The image size of the strong watermelon-compatible image is larger than that of the weak watermelon-compatible image The second effect image may be a slot machine in which the priority of the image display is set to be higher than that of the first effect image. Further, the first effect image may be a slot machine in which the priority of image display is set higher than that of the second effect image.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed / provided by a removable recording medium to the computer device etc. included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the computer device etc. may be previously provided. It may be distributed by pre-installing it in the storage device of. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  And the execution form of the game is not limited to that executed by attaching the removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. in the internal memory etc. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

1 ... pachinko gaming machine 2 ... gaming board 3 ... gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... special symbol display device 5 ... image display device 5 HL ... 1st start prize memory display area 5HR ... 2nd start prize memory display area 5H ... start prize Memory display area 6A ... ordinary winning ball device 6B ... ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... special variable winning ball device 8 ... speaker 9 ... lamp 11 ... main board 12 ... effect control board 13 ... voice control board 14 ... lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 16 ... character control board 17 ... movable part 20 ... ordinary symbol display 21 ... gate switch 22A ... first start port switch 22B ... second start port switch 23 ... count switch 31A ... stick controller 31B ... push button 100 ... Microcomputer for game control 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... display control unit 126 ... RTC circuit

Claims (2)

A gaming machine capable of variably displaying identification information and controlling it to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
An effect execution unit that executes an effect using the effect image;
Character information display means for displaying character information related to variable display;
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a first effect of displaying a first effect image in a first area of the first layer,
It is possible to execute a second effect of displaying a second effect image in a second area wider than the first area in the second layer arranged on the front side of the first layer,
When the first effect and the second effect are performed, the first effect image is displayed on the first layer, and the second effect image is displayed on the second layer, whereby the first effect image is displayed. Display the second effect image on the front side of the
When variable display of identification information is performed, the identification information is displayed on a layer disposed on the back side of the first layer,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed, the identification information is displayed on a layer disposed in front of the second layer,
The character information display means is
Display character information corresponding to the effect being executed during variable display,
Even when the second effect image is displayed, the content of the character information is displayed so as to be identifiable,
A game machine characterized by making the display time of the character information different according to the type of effect corresponding to the character information. Holding display means for displaying a holding display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is being held;
Correspondence display means for displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display being executed;
Equipped with
It is possible to change the hold indication and the correspondence indication to a high expectation mode controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and the ratio of the timing changing to the high expectation mode differs according to the variable indication mode. The gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that.